JP7238668B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns (see Patent Document 1, for example). This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a launching means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting input as a trigger for executing a lottery based on the entry of a game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine comprising ball means and game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific game control state advantageous to the player based on the result of a lottery , wherein the game machine detects a game ball. A first-order flow detectable state in which a first-order value can be given to a player when a game ball is detected, and a second-order value smaller than the first-order value is given to a player when a game ball is detected. A secondary flow detectable state that can be imparted , and a tertiary flow detectable state that can impart a tertiary value smaller than the secondary value to the player when the game ball is detected. and a first detection means capable of detecting a predetermined game ball that has flowed down in the first flow detectable state, and a specific game ball that has flowed down in the second flow detectable state. a second detection means capable of detecting the, a third detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has flowed down in the third flow detectable state, a first flow detectable state and a second a predetermined operating state in which the game ball can flow in either the primary flow detectable state or the secondary flow detectable state during the period in which the game ball can flow in both of the flow detectable states ; and an operating member that is controlled to a non-operating state in which a game ball can flow down in the third flow detectable state , and a switch that switches the operating member from the non-operating state to a predetermined operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. means, which can shift to a predetermined control state after the start of the specific game control state, and can shift to the special game control state when the specific ball entry condition is satisfied after the transition to the predetermined control state; Both the next flow detectable state and the secondary flow detectable state are configured to be generated after the start of the same predetermined control state after shifting to the specific game control state, and the game machine In the flow detectable state, the secondary flow detectable state, and the tertiary flow detectable state, flow paths are formed on different surfaces in a front view of the game board, and the game is played by the tertiary detection means. It is characterized in that, when a ball is detected, one game ball or less can be given to one game ball detected .

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, a gaming machine can increase the attention of a player to a game.

Front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device Diagram showing the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. Diagram showing a flowchart of pending decision processing A diagram showing a flowchart of pending occurrence processing Diagram showing a flowchart of hold shift processing A diagram showing the notice pending design, normal pending design, and special pending design displayed on the display screen of the design display device A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to Reference Mode A of the present invention; FIG. A diagram showing a flowchart of pending occurrence processing A diagram showing the notice pending design, normal pending design, and special pending design displayed on the display screen of the design display device A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing Diagram showing the flow of the look-ahead effect A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area. The display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first pending shift process is executed after it is specified that the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area diagram showing The display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second pending shift process is executed after it is specified that the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area diagram showing After it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area, the first hold shift process is executed, and then the special hold is placed in the first area of the second sub-side holding area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that information is stored. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. A diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process according to the reference form B of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. The display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area diagram showing A diagram showing a flowchart of a production pattern determination process according to the reference form C of the present invention. After it is specified that the special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area, the pattern display in the case of ending the performance for consuming the special suspension and executing the performance for consuming the advance notice suspension. Diagram showing the display screen of the device and each layer of the frame buffer The front view of the game board according to the reference form D of the present invention Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage after rotation of a rotating member. A diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that enter the guideway The figure which shows the operation state of a rotating member when a game ball collides with a revolving door. A diagram showing game balls distributed to routes falling into the game area A front view of a game board according to the reference form E of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage after rotation of a rotating member. A diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that enter the guideway A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the projecting portion. A diagram showing game balls distributed to routes falling into the game area A front view of a game board according to the reference form F of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage after rotation of a rotating member. A front view of a game board according to reference form G of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage after rotation of a rotating member. The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage based on the reference form H of this invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device The front view which expanded the vicinity of the two-step stage after rotation of a rotating member. A diagram showing game balls distributed to routes falling into the game area 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. Enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged A plan view of the croon enlarged and viewed from the vertical upper side The figure which shows the croon induction|guidance|derivation state which rotated the rotation body. The figure which shows the start opening guidance state which rotated the rotation body. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for open winning Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing Diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device before executing the special game A diagram showing a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device in a state in which a special game is being executed. Enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged The figure which shows the crew guidance state which moved the moving body. The figure which shows the starting entrance induction|guidance|derivation state which moved the moving body. Diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged A diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the croon by the rotation distribution means A diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the open start port by the rotation distribution means Diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention Enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing A diagram showing the opening amount of the opening and closing door of the operation winning device

[Reference form]
A reference embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 1, and a game machine body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 121 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the parts on the support side, and a front door frame 121 arranged behind the inner frame and on the rear with one of the left and right side parts on the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the main body 12 of the game machine with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking the front door frame 121 with respect to the inner frame. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 13 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 121 has a substantially elliptical window portion 122 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 fitted in the window portion 122 . In addition, in this embodiment, the window panel 123 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 121 includes a display lamp portion 124 provided above the window portion 122 as part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 122, and a display lamp portion 124, and includes a speaker unit 125 that outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 14 and a lower bulging portion 15 provided below the window portion 122. there is

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 14 has an upper plate 141 provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 141 temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball shooting mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 15 also has a lower plate 151 provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 151 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 141 .

Furthermore, the front door frame 121 has a firing handle 16 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 151 . The shooting handle 16 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 1 to shoot game balls from a game ball shooting mechanism 49 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 16 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 2, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 2 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 122 .
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 23 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 when the player rotates the launch handle 16. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 16 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this reference embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 2 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 2 includes a general winning port 24 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 25, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an out port 28 . The game board 2 includes through gates 31 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 2 has a large number of nails NL planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 27 is provided with detection sensors 301 to 304 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 301 to 304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 . Specifically, the general winning port 24 includes a detection sensor 301, the upper operating port 25 includes a detecting sensor 302, the lower operating port 26 includes a detecting sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 includes a detecting sensor 304. It has The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301 to 304 may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 24 . The pachinko machine 1 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 25 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 26.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 27.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 25 and 26 may be different.

Out port 28 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 2 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 28.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 28 is provided with a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 305 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 . When a ball enters the out hole 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 is provided with a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. When a ball enters each through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning slot.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out port 28, the game ball entering various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Further, entering the through gate 31 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry of the ball into the through gate 31 is also referred to as winning as well as the entry of the ball into various prize-winning openings.

The upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 2 . Each operating port 25, 26 is opened upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 25 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 26 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 26 has an electric accessory 261 as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 261 is connected to an electric accessory driving section 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2 . The electric accessory 261 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive unit 262 . The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 26 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 261 closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 26 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 261 in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operation opening 25 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operation opening 25 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 26 when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 26 when the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 261 has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 26 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower A configuration may be adopted in which the operation port 26 is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. In addition, the lower operation port 26 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 261 but by displacing the lower operation port 26. 26 may not include the electric accessory 261 .

The variable winning device 27 drives a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening and closing door 272 for opening and closing the big winning opening 271, and the opening and closing door 272. A variable winning driving unit 273 is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 27 avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the game board 2 has a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27 . The cover 29 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 291 formed to make the variable winning device 27 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 291 provided around the transparent panel 291 and formed opaquely. panel 292;
Therefore, the player can see the variable prize winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122 .

The big winning opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 271 is provided with the detection sensor 304 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 271 . The opening/closing door 272 advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to close the opening of the big winning opening 271, and retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 to open the game board. 2, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 271 is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 273 sets the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 272 .

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big winning opening 271 . In addition, in the open/close execution mode, after the open/close door 272 is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The main display device 32 has a main display unit 34 and a character object display unit 35, and includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and other display devices. arranged and configured.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to protrude toward the window panel 123 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 32 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123 . Also, the distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 32 .

The main display section 34 includes a first result display section 341 for displaying the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working opening 25 and the internal drawing performed based on the winning at the lower working opening 26. A second result display section 342 for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 341 executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning to the upper working port 25 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 25 to display the results of If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 341 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 26 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 26. to display the results of If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 342 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

The character object display unit 35 executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 31 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 31. to display the results of The accessory display unit 35 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operation opening 26 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 34 and character object display unit 35 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 34 and the character object display unit 35 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 33 includes a pattern display device 36 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 33 has a center frame 37 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 36 . The upper portion of the center frame 37 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, so that the visibility of the display screen G is not deteriorated due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 36 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26 . That is, when the symbol display device 36 performs the variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 36 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 37 includes a first holding lamp portion 371 provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 36, a second holding lamp portion 372 provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 36, and a pattern display. and a third holding lamp portion 373 provided in the upper region of the device 36 .

The first reservation lamp part 371 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper working hole 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This first holding lamp portion 371 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 341 and the symbol display device 36 .
The second reservation lamp part 372 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp part 372 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display part 342 and the pattern display device 36 .
The third reservation lamp part 373 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 373 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 35 .
Note that each of the holding lamp units 371 to 373 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 36, which will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, eight kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The pattern display device 36 periodically scrolls the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from the start of variable display on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the wins to the operation ports 25 and 26 .

It should be noted that the pattern display device 36 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a sound emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 has a payout control device 46 and a power supply/fire control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/shooting control device 47 executes shooting control for causing the above-described game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot game balls.

The main controller 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main controller 4 has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41 and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42 . Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc. are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 4 .

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 431 , a distribution table storage area 432 , and a reach table storage area 433 . These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 43, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 44 has various areas such as various counter areas 441 , a pending ball storage area 442 , and an electrical pending area 443 . These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main controller 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301-306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 , the payout control device 46 and the sound emission control device 5 . In addition, the output ports of the MPU 42 include an electric accessory drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric accessory 261 of the lower operation port 26, a variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 34 and the character object display unit 35 .

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 262 to open and close the electric accessory 261 . Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 273 to open and close the big winning opening 271 . Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 25 and 26 . Further, the MPU 42 executes display control of the character item display unit 35 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 31 .

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays the main control board 41 and the power supply/launch control device 47 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. . Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 45 .
The detection sensors 301 to 306 correspond to the general winning opening 24, the upper working opening 25, the lower working opening 26, various winning openings of the variable winning device 27, the out opening 28, and each through gate 31 on a one-to-one basis. is provided. The MPU 42 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 28 and each through gate 31 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306 . In addition, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation opening 25 or the lower operation opening 26 .

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 4. do.

The power supply/emission control device 47 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, amusement arcades. Then, the power supply/launch control device 47 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 41 and the payout control device 46 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power supply/launch control device 47 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply section supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control unit 4 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 47 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feeder that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 23 toward the guide rail 23 . The power/shooting control device 47 supplies a drive signal (shooting permission signal) to this solenoid to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU of Main Control Unit>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 42 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display continuation time on the main display section 34 and the symbol display device 36. Further, the MPU 42 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26 is to be in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter area 441 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM44.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 25 or the lower working port 26. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 443 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 31. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 442 includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information, in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 25. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper opening 25 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 42 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is provided with four storage areas, so that up to four winnings of game balls into the upper working opening 25 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 25 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserved information, in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 26. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 26 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 42 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 26 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the lower working port 26 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 341 and 342. This is the area to move the .

The electric service reservation area 443 includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 31 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 31 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 31. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443, the MPU 42 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 26 by setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 261 to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 261 to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state when winning the electric role open state is larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 261 to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 35) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 26 than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player left-handedly hits the firing handle 16 with a medium rotational operation amount, and the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed as the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side portion to the central portion, the probability of winning the upper working opening 25 rather than the lower working opening 26 can be increased. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 23 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the lower working opening 26 rather than the upper working opening 25 can be increased.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a left-handed route (first-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the upper working port 25 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower working port 26. 1 route) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower working port 26 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper working port 25. there is

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 26. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 .

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 431 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as win/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two win/fail lottery modes of a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 42 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. - 特許庁

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the win/fail table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 25, and the game ball wins in the lower working port 26. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442, when the jackpot occurs, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 7, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). ing.
The MPU 42 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 .

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display portion reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 25 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 7A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are distributed to “unspecified low ``15 to 19'' are assigned to ``Highly Probable Round Results'', and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most Favorable Results''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 26 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 7(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 27 in opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
"Unexplained few rounds high probability result", "Explicit few rounds high probability result", and "Most favorable result" are high probability of winning lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the winning lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery.
The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 25, and the game ball enters the lower working port 26. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 at the timing.
And MPU42 performs the lottery (reach generation lottery) of whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding ball storage area 442. FIG.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 42 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 442 when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores random numbers related to occurrence of ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 (see FIG. 4).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "best result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 36 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, in the case of "big win" in the lottery lottery and "low-probability result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 36 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the valid line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the case of a "special loss result" without becoming, the symbol display device 36 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result, but a "normal loss result" in the win-or-fail lottery. A combination of special symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") having numbers different from each other, which will not be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 1 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 36 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, Players can be expected to be sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 36. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 36 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display was performed by the main controller 4, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 5. .

The mode of the advance notice display is a partial symbol row (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2, Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 42 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 34 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 36 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. These display durations will be described later in detail.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main controller>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, and main processing that starts when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 42 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 301-306. In this reading process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301 to 304 corresponding to various winning ports have detected the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is sent to the payout control device 46 . For example, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number, to the payout control device 46.
The payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 42 .

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 . do. The MPU 42 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 . The MPU 42 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is detected. is stored in the electric service reservation area 443 . Also, the MPU 42 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 373 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 5 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 lights the third suspension lamp section 373 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42 . Further, the number of reserved game balls winning each through gate 31 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 373 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper operating port 25 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 25 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the upper working port 25, in step S202, it grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra, and reserves the number of balls. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU42 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 25, in step S203, the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 detects the winning of the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 26 (start winning).
When the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 26, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won in the lower operation opening 26, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU42 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 42 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S206, the value of the start pending memory number N is updated by adding 1 to it.

In step S207, the MPU 42 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the result display holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206 is stored in the storage area corresponding to "4". Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 42 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 42 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S208, the MPU 42, when the first start-up pending storage number RaN is set in step S202, stores the pending information in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. 1 hold generation command is set, and this set first hold generation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 5 . After that, the MPU 42 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
This first pending generation command is for making the sound emission control device 5 recognize that the pending information is stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 25. contains information about Also, the first pending issue command contains information about the current support mode.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 turns on the first suspension lamp unit 371 based on the first suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, and also executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail. In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 25 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the first reservation lamp portion 371 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

Further, in step S208, the MPU 42, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set in step S204, is for recognizing that the pending information is stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. , and transmits the set second hold generation command to the sound emission control device 5 . After that, the MPU 42 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
This second hold generation command is used to make the sound emission control device 5 recognize that the hold information is stored in the storage area of the second result display portion hold area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 26. contains information about Also, the second pending issue command contains information about the current support mode.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 lights up the second suspension lamp unit 372 based on the second suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, and also executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail. Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 26 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the second reservation lamp portion 372 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 42 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes a timer interrupt process, a winning process for an actuation opening, or an external output process for transmitting a command set in the previous normal process to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 46 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game cycle or a command corresponding to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is set, and determines whether the command for effect is set. When it is determined that it is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 5. - 特許庁

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. . In addition, when the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 36, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 42 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demonstration command for starting the demonstration display is set. The MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 42 .

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and when the number of execution times reaches 7500, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, when the MPU 42 starts a new game cycle while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 42 executes electric support processing for executing drive control of the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower working port 26 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and also executes the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 261 is executed. Further, the MPU 42 performs display control of the accessory display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply/shooting control device 47 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 16 by the player. Specifically, the power/shooting control device 47 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is excited so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 16 . In addition, the power/shooting control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42 . The power failure monitor board 45 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44 .

When the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 42 executes the power failure processing from step S312 onward without executing the processing from step S309 onward. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 44). In step S314, MPU42 prohibits the access to RAM44. After that, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet reached, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 42 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 42 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 5) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed. When the MPU 42 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 42 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, it executes the processing from step S403 onward.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 42 permits access to the RAM 44. FIG.
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 47 is turned on.
When the MPU 42 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44. do.

When the MPU 42 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 42 executes the processes from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 42 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be checked by determining in the main processing whether the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 42 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the work area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 44 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 initializes the data stored in the RAM 44 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 45 or when the RAM judgment value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 42 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 5) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the process after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 25 and 26 is detected.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 34 is performing variable display, that is, whether the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display section 34 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 42 executes the game turn start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display section 34 is performing the variable display, it executes the processing for game turn progress in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 42 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 42 causes the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second start holding storage number RbN of the second result display holding area Rb set in step S204 of the winning process for the working opening is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 42 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 26, the upper operation opening 25 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 44. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display section 341 and the second result display section 342 the main display section 34 is caused to start the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, since the MPU 42 clears the second result display section flag, when the game cycle is completed, the first result display section 341 displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working opening 25. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the data setting process. The MPU 42 transmits the command for the first shift set in step S606 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing. This command at the time of the first shift emits a voice to indicate that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 25. It contains information for the control device 5 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 371 based on the command for the first shift transmitted from the MPU 42, and also executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail. Specifically, the sound emission control device 5 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 371 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 25 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 44. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 342 displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 26. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the data setting process. The MPU 42 transmits the command for the second shift set in step S611 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing. This command at the time of the second shift emits a voice to indicate that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 26. It contains information for the control device 5 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp section 372 based on the command for the second shift transmitted from the MPU 42, and also executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail. Specifically, the sound emission control device 5 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 372 as the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 431 of the ROM 43. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 431 of the ROM 43 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 42 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 42 determines that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" at step S705, it executes the processing from step S706 onwards, and when it determines that the win/fail result is not "jackpot winning" at step S705. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when the MPU 42 determines that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 44, the first result display section 341 starts a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the upper opening 25. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM43.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44 in step S706, the second result display section 342 based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 26 , the second distribution table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM 43 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU42 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 42 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 44 . Here, the MPU 42 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 43, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag in the RAM 44 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 42 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result" , set the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, and if it is specified as "explicit small-round high-probability result", set the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and set the "most favorable result" , then set the best result flag. Then, MPU42 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the win/fail result is not the "big hit win" at step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the result determined in step S704 is the "special loss result".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onward, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 44 . Here, the MPU 42 refers to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in the ROM 43 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special out flag in the RAM 44. FIG.
Incidentally, in each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is the "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 44 . Here, the MPU 42 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results stored in advance in the ROM 43 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 42 executes display duration time (display duration) setting processing in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44 .

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the symbol display device 36 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 42 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. Run a reach generation lottery.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the MPU 42 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach generation table storage area 433 of the ROM 43, so that the fluctuation type counter obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 42 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43. A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 .

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 25 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 25 increases. Further, the display continuation time when the pending information related to the lower working port 26 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 26 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

At step S717, the MPU 42 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 42 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs is not included in the variation command, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 5, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

The type command includes information regarding the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to the sorting result. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the sorting result, each of the "low probability result", the "non-explicit few round high probability result", the "explicit few round high probability result", and the "best result". contains information.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information regarding the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44, and causes the main display section 34 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 42 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 44, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 341 is to start the variable display, the first result display section 341 is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 342 is to start the variable display, the second result display section 342 is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the main display section 34 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 44 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, it executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 42 updates the display on the main display section 34 during variable display. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 42 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 42 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 34). Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 34 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 34 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game parlor can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 1 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a jackpot lottery. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display unit 34 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 instead of the main display section 34 to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 42 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42 . Here, the sound emission control device 5 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the processing from step S811 onwards is executed.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined that the MPU 42 is not in the open/close execution mode in step S801 will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended. When the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win-or-fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win-fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", in step S805 the MPU 42 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. FIG. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of opening and closing times of the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 in the MPU 42 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "low-probability result" or the "best result", step In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 42 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds regulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot winning", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 271 is opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls win the big winning hole 271 . Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 271 corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big winning hole 271 once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S811) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the big winning opening 271 is open.
When the MPU 42 determines that the large winning opening 271 is not open in step S901, it executes the processing after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the big winning opening 271 is open in step S901, it executes the processes after step S906.

First, in step S901, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the big winning opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S904, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
In the following, a detailed description will be given of the big winning opening opening process in step S904.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning result is a "special losing result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1002, the MPU 42 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44, and At S1003, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not the "special losing result", in step S1004, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1005, the allocation result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, it sets "85" to the timer counter T in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 sets the open/close door 272 to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 . After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 271. FIG. Here, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the same value (in this embodiment, "8") is set in the winning counter PC, but different values may be set in the winning counter PC.

Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time from when the open/close door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 42 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 42 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Moreover, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 271 to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 271 and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 271 .
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 271 and the game ball launch cycle (further mentioning the game ball launch (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 271 . It should be noted that it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 271 depending on the timing.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
The MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905 after executing the big winning opening opening process of step S904. In addition, the MPU 42 transmits the open command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 42, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening/closing door 272 has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S906) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the big winning opening 271 is being opened in step S901 will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S918.

First, the processing (processing after step S907) when the MPU 42 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" in step S906 will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning port 271. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 271 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the large winning opening 271 .

When the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 271, the MPU 42 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 271, in step S908, the value of the prize winning counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S910 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 sets the open/close door 272 to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive section 273 .

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a closing command. The MPU 42 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 42, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening/closing door 272 has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 272 is set to the open state until the open/close door 272 is set to the open state again. stipulates. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. The MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S918) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a closing command as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "big win", it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S921) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S920 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after S916 described above.

Next, the processing (processing after step S923) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after S916 described above.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S811, the MPU 42 checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812. judge.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S813 the value of the timer counter T becomes " 0” or less.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result for a small number of explicit rounds", the process from step S1102 onwards is executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result for a small number of explicit rounds", the processing from step S1105 onwards is executed.

First, in step S1101, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 42 determines that the distribution result is the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds" will be described.
At step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. FIG. The MPU 42 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 44 . Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 44. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big hit" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1104, the MPU 42 sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 44. FIG. The MPU 42 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44 . As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability clear the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Next, processing (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the sorting result is not the "most favorable result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108.

First, the processing (processing after step S1106) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. The MPU 42 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44 . As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1108) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it ends the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1109.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. FIG. The MPU 42 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 44 . Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1111, the MPU 42 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. FIG.
At step S1112, the MPU 42 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 44. FIG. The MPU 42 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44 . After that, the MPU 42 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 42 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is "unexplained small round high probability result", After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". Then, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

<Electrical configuration of sound emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the sound emission control device 5 includes a sound emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the sound emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541 , various counter areas 542 , and sub-side pending information storage area 543 . These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 , speaker unit 125 and display control device 6 .
The MPU 52 controls the driving of various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main controller 4 .
Also, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 6 . The sound emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the contents of the sub-side pending information storage area.
The sub-side reservation information storage area 543, as shown in FIG. 20, comprises a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side reservation area SRa provided as the first sub-side acquisition information storage means comprises four storage areas of a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4. Each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for causing a normal hold and advance notice hold information for causing a notice hold. The normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for causing the notice hold will be described later in detail.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in the areas SRa1 to SRa4 in time series in accordance with the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 sends sub-side hold information in the order of the first area SRa1→second area SRa2→third area SRa3→fourth area SRa4. Store in chronological order.

Thus, since the first sub-side reservation area SRa has four storage areas, up to four pieces of sub-side reservation information based on the first reservation generation command are reserved. Also, the first sub-side reservation area SRa has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in the areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side reservation area SRb provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas of a first area SRb1 to a fourth area SRb4. Each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for causing a notice hold. The normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for causing the notice hold will be described later in detail.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the sub-side hold information is sent in the order of the first area SRb1→second area SRb2→third area SRb3→fourth area SRb4. Store in chronological order.

Thus, the second sub-side reserved area SRb has four storage areas, so that up to four pieces of sub-side reserved information based on the second reservation generation command are reserved. Further, the second sub-side reservation area SRb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is for moving the sub-side reservation information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reservation area SRa or the second sub-side reservation area SRb when starting the variable display of the pattern display device 36. area.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, a video A RAM 67 is provided. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 are integrated into a chip. The MPU 62 , VDP 65 , character ROM 66 and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61 .

The MPU 62 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 5 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 65 . Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65 .

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63. The work RAM 64 is a volatile memory that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 65 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 36 . Since the VDP 65 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores the image data in the video RAM 67 .

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 36 . The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 67 .

This video RAM 67 comprises a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69 . Note that the drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say things.

Here, the frame buffer 69 comprises a plurality of frame areas 691,692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692 .

Each of the frame areas 691 and 692 is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 691 and 692 includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area adopts a full-color system, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a total storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The VDP 65 draws on the pattern display device 36 using drawing data created in one frame region (for example, the first frame region 691), while the other frame region (for example, the second frame region 692) ) to create drawing data to be used next. That is, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and transmits the image signal to the pattern display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691 and 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts the drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36 . Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on this gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36 .

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2006, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42 , it stores the command in the RAM 54 . Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands transmitted from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order transmitted from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes hold determination processing based on the command sent from the MPU 42. FIG. In the pending determination process, the MPU 52 determines the generation of pending designs, the shifting of pending designs, and the like. This hold determination process will be described later in detail.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes effect determination processing based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination processing will be described later in detail.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes effect execution processing based on the content of the suspension determination process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of various lamp units 124 and 371 to 373 and executes sound control of the speaker unit 125 .

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 42. FIG. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 52 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game round being started after the game round is finished. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of various lamp units 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 .

In step S2006, command transmission processing for transmitting the commands set in the suspension determination processing in step S2002 and the effect determination processing in step S2003 to the display control device 6 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 6 . After that, the MPU 52 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding hold determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes pending decision processing in order to generate pending patterns, shift pending patterns, and the like. In this hold determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the pending command (first pending command or second pending command) transmitted from the MPU 42 is received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that the hold generation command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has received the pending command, it executes pending processing in step S2102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 52 stores sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the content of the hold generation command. This pending generation process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S2102, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the pending command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2103 and subsequent steps.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 is received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that the pending shift command has not been received, it ends the pending determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that it has received a hold shift command, it executes hold shift processing in step S2104. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This pending shift process will be described later in detail. After that, the MPU 52 terminates the suspension occurrence process.

<Holding process>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a hold generation process.
In the hold occurrence process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores sub-side pending information in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 based on the content of the pending command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first pending command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first suspension generation command, in step S2202, it grasps the number of suspensions stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa, and determines the number of suspensions. It is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side reservation area SRa as the first sub-side start reservation storage number SRaN. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first pending command (if it determines that it has received the second pending command), in step S2203, the The number of reservations stored in the second sub-side reservation area SRb is grasped, and the number of reservations is set in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side reservation area SRb as the second sub-side start reservation storage number SRbN. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the sub-side start pending storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) to update it in step S2204.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes lottery processing for notice suspension. In this advance notice suspension lottery process, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice suspension.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice suspension by using the value of the advance notice suspension occurrence counter. Note that the notice suspension occurrence counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54 .

Here, the advance notice suspension utilizes advance notice display for changing the type of pending picture, etc. to inform the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension, and production of a game cycle based on the suspension that is digested before the suspension. By doing so, it is a hold that executes a notice display or the like that generates a look-ahead effect that informs the player of the degree of expectation of the hold.

The notice suspension occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice pending occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54 .
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (announcement suspension occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement suspension based on the value of the announcement suspension occurrence counter stored in the announcement suspension occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice pending occurrence counter stored in the notice pending occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice pending occurrence table to determine whether or not to generate the notice pending. conduct a lottery. Note that the advance notice pending occurrence table is a table that stores values of random numbers relating to the occurrence of advance notice pending, and is stored in the ROM 53 .

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for notice suspension occurrence has been won in step S2205 (whether to generate notice suspension).
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the notice suspension is to be generated, in step S2207, the MPU 52 executes notice suspension generation processing. In this advance notice pending generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing for causing notice pending. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the contents of this advance notice pending generation processing.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the sub-side suspension areas, ie, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in step S2202, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, that is, the number updated in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets "3" to the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" in the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The notice suspension information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area to be used.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb, that is, in step S2204 The notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN updated in step S2204 to "4". The notice suspension information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 not to generate the advance notice suspension, in step S2208 the normal suspension generation processing is executed. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the content of this normal hold generation processing.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal suspension information in the first memory area among the empty storage areas of the sub-side reservation areas, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in step S2202, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, that is, the number updated in step S2204. The normal suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets "3" to the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" in the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb, that is, in step S2204 The normal suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN updated in step S2204 to "4". The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for

After executing the advance notice pending generation process in step S2207 or the normal pending pending process in step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a pending display generation command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for causing the pattern display device 36 to generate advance notice suspension or normal suspension based on the suspension display generation command sent from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . Thereby, the pattern display device 36 displays the notice pending pattern or the normal pending pattern on the display screen G to inform the player of the occurrence of the notice pending or the normal pending.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hold shift processing.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes hold shift processing in step S2104 of the hold determination processing. In this pending shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending area based on the content of the pending shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received the first shift time command, it executes the data setting processing of the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304. If it is determined that the shift time command has not been received (if it has been determined that the second shift time command has been received), data setting processing for the second sub-side reservation area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 is executed. .

First, data setting processing for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start reservation storage number SRaN in the first sub-side reservation area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes data shift processing for shifting the sub-side reservation information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reservation area SRa. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side pending information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 to the first area SRa1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side pending information of the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, shifts the sub-side pending information of the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and shifts the sub-side pending information of the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2. The side hold information is shifted to the third area SRa3.

Next, data setting processing for the second sub-side reservation area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start reservation storage number SRbN in the second sub-side reservation area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes data shift processing for shifting the sub-side reservation information stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side pending information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side pending information of the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, shifts the sub-side pending information of the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and shifts the sub-side pending information of the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2. The side hold information is shifted to the third area SRb3.

After executing the process of step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets a pending display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the pending display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This hold display shift time command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the normal hold shift and the advance notice hold shift on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the pattern display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute the normal hold shift and the advance notice hold shift.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the advance notice reserved design and normal reserved design displayed on the display screen of the design display device.
As shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 62 includes pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to four storage areas of a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, and a second sub-side reservation area SRa. Pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to fourth area SRb4 of the area SRb, and execution pedestals provided between the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE. AB is displayed on the display screen G.

The first reservation lamp portion 371 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, ie, a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa from left to right. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa from right to left.
In addition, the second reservation lamp portion 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from left to right. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from left to right.

The pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB notify the player of the occurrence of the advance notice suspension or the normal suspension by placing the notice suspension pattern or the normal suspension pattern thereon.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side holding area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command or hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this case, white sphere patterns, which are normally reserved patterns, are placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines that the advance notice pending information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side holding area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command or hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B11 to B14, a picture of a flashing white sphere, which is a notice pending picture, is placed.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, Places a white sphere design, which is a normal reserved design, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 identifies that the advance notice pending information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side holding area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command or hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B21 to B24, a picture of a flashing white sphere, which is a notice pending picture, is placed.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the normal pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the command during the pending display shift transmitted from the MPU 52, the normal pending pattern is displayed on the execution base AB. A pattern of a white sphere is placed.
When the MPU 62 determines that the advance notice pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the notice hold pattern is placed on the execution base AB. Place a pattern of blinking white spheres.

Here, in the example of FIG. 26, the MPU 62 places the normal reserved design on the pedestals B11 and B12, places the advance notice reserved design on the pedestal B13, and places the normal reserved design on the execution pedestal AB. is placed. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places a normal reserved design on the pedestal B21. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any pattern on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In this reference embodiment, the pictures of normal suspension and advance notice suspension are different from each other, but they may be the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but each pedestal may not be displayed on the display screen G.

<Regarding production determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2409 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has been received, in step S2402, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S2403, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 52 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2404, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not the “normal result”, that is, the game result is the “special result”, the “non-explicit small round high probability result”, and the “explicit small round high probability result”. If it is either, in step S2405, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2406, the MPU 52 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal-out symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 52 determines information relating to the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the pay line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 52 provides information on a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406, the MPU 52 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . Specifically, the MPU 52 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2403, S2405 and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 retrieves from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52. read out. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . Thereby, the symbol display device 36 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2408, or when determining in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2413.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, in step S2410 the MPU 52 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 52 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the game result is determined to be the "best result", the MPU 52 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "low-probability result", it selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Also, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2411. Then, the MPU 52 stores the opening/closing execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the pattern display device 36 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2412, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2409, the MPU 52 executes processing from step S2413 onward.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 52 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42 . After that, the MPU 52 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure results" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1, as game results excluding the "ordinary loss result", the success or failure result of "jackpot win" and "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit It has distribution results of "few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 28, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 271 is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" are different in the type of opening and closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is performed twice in a short time mode. are doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. In addition, "special outlier results" and "implicit few-round high-probability results" do not transition to support mode. In addition, the symbol display device 36 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 271 is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped.

Then, in the game cycle after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the pattern display device 36 displays an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 36 does not display on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected. times) is reached, an image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that the mode will be shifted to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 36, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, will finally change the effect for the opening/closing execution mode to the effect D. If so, the game result is camouflaged as if it were a "low-probability result".

Then, when the sorting result is the "most advantageous result", the pattern display device 36 does not become "big win winning" in the winning lottery, and is in the high probability mode after 100 game rounds are completed. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 36 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

[Modification of reference form]
In addition, the reference form of the present invention is not limited to the reference form described above, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within a range that can achieve the object of the present invention.
(1) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 executes the opening and closing of the big winning hole 271 once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the big winning opening 271 a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game ball to the big winning opening 271 When the total number of wins reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 272 is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 271 reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. , the opening/closing door 272 is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then, when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door is opened. 272 was set to closed again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) elapses, and the opening/closing door 272 is closed again. had set. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 opens the opening/closing door 272 when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 271 occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again.
(7) In this reference embodiment, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 272 such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In the present embodiment, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In this embodiment, the MPU 52, if the game result is one of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result", the active line Information relating to a special combination of symbols was determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on L, and this special combination of symbols was the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the game result.

(11) In the present embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 42 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM44.

(12) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of loss results, ie, a "special loss result" and a "normal loss result", and the MPU 42 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. By comparing the success/failure table with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442, the lottery for the occurrence of the big hit is executed. In other words, the MPU 42 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 42 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In the present embodiment, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to during the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the number of random numbers that become the "special loss result" is two. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the winning/failure lottery mode and the support mode. By setting , a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and disadvantageous game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 25 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information concerning the lower working opening 26 for the second result display section. By storing in the reservation area Rb, the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 25 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 26 together.
(16) In the present reference embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 26 for completion of the game cycle regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 25 . On the other hand, the MPU 42 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In this embodiment, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 5, and the audio light emission control device 5 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 6. , the control of the display control device 6 was executed. In response to this, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the display control device 6, and the display control device 6 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 5, thereby controlling the sound emission. Control of device 5 may be performed. Commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to the sound emission control device 5 and commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this embodiment.
(18) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has the main control device 4, the sound emission control device 5, and the display control device 6 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 4 .

(19) In the present embodiment, the symbol display device 36 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbols on the display screen G, an effect for the game cycle is executed. On the other hand, the effect for the game cycle is not limited to the effect described in this reference embodiment, and is optional. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 2 and the pattern display device 36 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light emitting means provided on the game board 2 and the symbol display device 36 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 36 to operate.

(20) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 25 or the lower working port 26, and then the main display unit 34 and The symbol display device 36 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper working port 25 or the lower working port 26 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 34 and the pattern display device 36 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main display unit 34, and the main display unit 34 carries out variable display of patterns, and displays the result of internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. was On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 34 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to include the main display section 34 .

(22) In this reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbols on the display screen G, an effect for the game cycle is executed. On the other hand, the symbol display device 36 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) indicating the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 36 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area that is narrower than the area for displaying the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area that displays the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the manager of the game arcade, for example, looks at the pattern display device 36 without looking at the main display section 34 at the end of the game round, in the same way as when winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 1 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 was illustrated and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 1. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Reference Form A]
Hereinafter, reference form A of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to Reference Mode A of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 29, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, a video A RAM 67 is provided. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 are integrated into a chip. The MPU 62 , VDP 65 , character ROM 66 and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61 .

The MPU 62 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 5 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 65 . Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65 .

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63. The work RAM 64 is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 65 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 36 . Since the VDP 65 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores the image data in the video RAM 67 .

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 36 . The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 67 .

This video RAM 67 comprises a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69 . Note that the drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say things.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has a plurality of frame areas 691A and 692A. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 comprises a first frame area 691A and a second frame area 692A.

The first frame region 691A includes a first layer 691A1, a second layer 691A2 with a lower priority than the first layer 691A1, and a third layer 691A3 with a lower priority than the second layer 691A2. Drawing data for one frame is stored by overlapping the layers 691A1 to 691A3 in order of priority.
The second frame region 692 includes a first layer 692A1, a second layer 692A2 with a lower priority than the first layer 692A1, and a third layer 692A3 with a lower priority than the second layer 692A2. Drawing data for one frame is stored by overlapping the layers 692A1 to 692A3 in order of priority.
In the following description, the first layers 691A1 and 692A1 are also simply referred to as the first layer L1, the second layers 691A2 and 692A2 are simply referred to as the second layer L2, and the third layers 691A3 and 692A3 are simply referred to as the third layer L2. Also called layer L3.

Therefore, each layer L1 to L3 is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each layer L1 to L3 includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) on the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area adopts a full-color system, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a total storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The VDP 65 draws on the pattern display device 36 using drawing data created in one frame region (for example, the first frame region 691), while the other frame region (for example, the second frame region 692) ) to create drawing data to be used next. That is, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and transmits the image signal to the pattern display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691 and 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts the drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36 . Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on this gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36 .

In this reference embodiment, the sound emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute different processes from those in the reference embodiment. Specifically, in the present reference form, the suspension occurrence process and the effect pattern determination process are different from those in the reference form. Hereinafter, the contents of the suspension generation process and the effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<Holding process>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a hold occurrence process.
In the hold occurrence process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 in substantially the same manner as in the reference embodiment. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores sub-side pending information in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 based on the content of the pending command. It should be noted that, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 52 differs from the reference embodiment in that it executes the processing of steps S2210A to S2212A after executing the processing of step S2204.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first pending command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first suspension generation command, in step S2202, it grasps the number of suspensions stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa, and determines the number of suspensions. It is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side reservation area SRa as the first sub-side start reservation storage number SRaN. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first pending command (if it determines that it has received the second pending command), in step S2203, the The number of reservations stored in the second sub-side reservation area SRb is grasped, and the number of reservations is set in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side reservation area SRb as the second sub-side start reservation storage number SRbN. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the sub-side start pending storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) to update it in step S2204.

In step S2210A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the content of the pending command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode (if it determines that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode), the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S2205.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it executes the processing from step S2211A.

First, the processing (processing after step S2205) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes lottery processing for notice suspension. In this advance notice suspension lottery process, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice suspension.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the notice suspension by using the value of the notice suspension occurrence counter. Note that the notice suspension occurrence counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54 .

Here, the advance notice suspension utilizes advance notice display for changing the type of pending picture, etc. to inform the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension, and production of a game cycle based on the suspension that is digested before the suspension. By doing so, it is a hold that executes a notice display or the like that generates a look-ahead effect that informs the player of the degree of expectation of the hold. Note that, in the present embodiment, the notice suspension for executing the notice display that causes the prefetch effect will be explained, and the explanation for the notice hold for executing the other notice display will be omitted.

The notice suspension occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice pending occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54 .
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (announcement suspension occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement suspension based on the value of the announcement suspension occurrence counter stored in the announcement suspension occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice pending occurrence counter stored in the notice pending occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice pending occurrence table to determine whether or not to generate the notice pending. conduct a lottery. Note that the advance notice pending occurrence table is a table that stores values of random numbers relating to the occurrence of advance notice pending, and is stored in the ROM 53 .

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for notice suspension occurrence has been won in step S2205 (whether to generate notice suspension).
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 to generate the advance notice suspension, in step S2207, the MPU 52 executes advance notice suspension generation processing. In this advance notice pending generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing for causing notice pending. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the contents of this advance notice pending generation processing.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the sub-side suspension areas, ie, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in step S2202, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, that is, the number updated in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets "3" to the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" in the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The notice suspension information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area to be used.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb, that is, in step S2204 The notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN updated in step S2204 to "4". The notice suspension information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2207 not to generate the advance notice suspension, it executes normal suspension generation processing in step S2209. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. In addition, the MPU 52 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the content of this normal hold generation processing.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal suspension information in the first memory area among the empty storage areas of the sub-side reservation areas, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in step S2202, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, that is, the number updated in step S2204. The normal suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets "3" to the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" in the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb, that is, in step S2204 The normal suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN updated in step S2204 to "4". The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for

Next, the processing (processing after step S2211A) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2211A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the second suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received (whether or not the second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN has been set in step S2203).

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2205 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has received the second pending command, it executes special pending processing in step S2212A. In this special hold occurrence process, the MPU 52 executes a process for causing a special hold. Also, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the content of this special hold generation processing.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the special suspension information in the first memory area among the empty storage areas of the sub-side reservation areas, ie, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

Here, since the MPU 52 has set the number SRbN of second sub-side start pending storage in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side holding area SRb, that is, the update is performed in step S2204. The special hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN updated in step S2204 to "4". Special hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for

In this way, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information as sub-side hold information in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold generation command. Each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing special hold information for causing a special hold.

After executing the advance notice pending occurrence processing in step S2207, the normal pending pending processing in step S2208, or the special pending pending processing in step S2212A, the MPU 52 sets a pending display issuing command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing advance notice suspension, normal suspension, or special suspension in the pattern display device 36 based on the suspension display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52. . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 . Thereby, the pattern display device 36 displays the notice pending pattern, the normal pending pattern, or the special pending pattern on the display screen G to inform the player of the occurrence of the advance notice pending, normal pending, or special pending.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 programs a data table for executing shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Read from the ROM 63 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the pattern display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the notice reserved design, the normal reserved design, and the special reserved design displayed on the display screen of the design display device.
As shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 includes pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to four storage areas of a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, and a second sub-side reservation area SRa. Pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to fourth area SRb4 of the area SRb, and execution pedestals provided between the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE. AB is displayed on the display screen G.

The first reservation lamp portion 371 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, ie, a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa from left to right. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa from right to left.
In addition, the second reservation lamp portion 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from left to right. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from left to right.

Pedestals B11 to B14, pedestals B21 to B24, and execution pedestal AB generate notice suspension, normal suspension, or special suspension by placing a notice suspension design, normal suspension design, or special suspension design on them. is notified to the player.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side holding area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command or hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this case, white sphere patterns, which are normally reserved patterns, are placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines that the notice suspension information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reservation area SRa based on the contents of the reservation display generation command or the reservation display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B11 to B14, a picture of a flashing white sphere, which is a notice pending picture, is placed.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, Places a white sphere design, which is a normal reserved design, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines that the notice suspension information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the content of the reservation display generation command or the reservation display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B21 to B24, a picture of a flashing white sphere, which is a notice pending picture, is placed.
When the MPU 62 identifies that the special hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command or hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A picture of a black sphere, which is a special reserved picture, is placed on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the normal pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the command during the pending display shift transmitted from the MPU 52, the normal pending pattern is displayed on the execution base AB. A pattern of a white sphere is placed.
When the MPU 62 specifies that the advance notice pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the notice hold pattern is placed on the execution base AB. Place a pattern of blinking white spheres.
When the MPU 62 determines that the special pending information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the pending display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the special pending pattern is placed on the execution base AB. A pattern of black spheres is placed.

Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 62 places the normal reserved design on the pedestals B11 and B12, places the advance notice reserved design on the pedestal B13, and places the normal reserved design on the execution pedestal AB. is placed. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places a special reserved design on the pedestal B21. In other words, in this example, the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any pattern on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In this reference embodiment, the patterns of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold are different from each other, but any two patterns may be the same, or all the patterns may be the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but each pedestal may not be displayed on the display screen G.

<Regarding production determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the reference mode. Note that, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 52 executes the processing of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, and then executes the processing of step S2407A. .

In step S2407A, the MPU 52 executes a production pattern determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . Specifically, the MPU 52 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407A, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above.
In the following, the effect pattern determination processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a production pattern determination process to select the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in the hold shift process is special hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special suspension information, in step S3002, the MPU 52 executes special suspension effect determination processing. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines an effect for the end of the special hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the contents of this special holding effect determination processing.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the special pending effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special suspension digesting effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the special suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute an effect for consuming the special hold.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, it sets a special hold effect end command in step S3004. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the special pending effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special holding effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the special suspension effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, renders the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the effect for finishing the special suspension). to clear.
In addition, in this reference form, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, in step S3004, always sets a special hold effect end command, The MPU 62 clears the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52 . On the other hand, the MPU 52 may set the special pending effect end command only when drawing data has been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 .

In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is advance notice hold information.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is the notice suspension information, the MPU 52 executes notice suspension effect determination processing in step S3006. In this advance notice suspension effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines an effect (prefetch effect) for ending the advance notice suspension. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the contents of this notice pending effect determination processing.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice pending effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice pending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side suspension information stored in the sub-side suspension information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice suspension effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This advance notice pending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing an effect for ending the advance notice suspension in the pattern display device 36 based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the pattern display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute an effect for canceling the advance notice suspension.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the flow of the look-ahead effect.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. By doing so, the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead performance is a performance for digestion of advance notice suspension for informing the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension by using the performance of the game cycle based on the suspension digested before the suspension. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 .

In the look-ahead effect, the flight start position is the upper right position of the display screen G, and after the angel character flies toward the center position (see FIG. 34A), the angel character flies from that position toward the upper left position. (see FIG. 34(B)). After that, in the look-ahead effect, the angel character starts flying from the upper left position (position in FIG. 34(B)) of the display screen G to the upper right position (see FIG. 34(C)). It is designed to return to its position. In the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIGS. 34A to 34C, the angel character is made to fly in an infinite loop by making the angel character fly again. Here, in the present embodiment, the time required for one loop of the look-ahead effect is 10 seconds.

Returning to the description of the effect pattern determination processing, the processing after step S3008 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes display duration accumulation processing. In this display duration accumulation processing, the MPU 52 calculates the display duration accumulation time based on the content of the variation command each time the notice pending effect determination processing of step S3006 is executed, and stores the accumulated display duration time in the RAM 54. Memorize. In other words, the accumulated display duration time indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the above-described advance notice suspension effect command includes information related to the accumulated display duration time. Therefore, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point when the angel character flies and the subsequent movement by receiving the information related to the accumulated display duration time from the MPU 52 . The initial value of the accumulated display duration time is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that it is not the notice suspension information, it sets the notice suspension effect end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice pending effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice pending effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This advance notice pending effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the advance notice pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, draws data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the effect for ending the advance notice pending). to clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes cumulative display duration reset processing. In this display duration cumulative reset process, the MPU 52 substitutes "0" for the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 and resets it.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3008, or after executing the process of step S3010, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. Thereafter, the MPU 52 terminates the effect pattern determination process. In other processes, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . Specifically, the MPU 52 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In addition, in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display other than the look-ahead effect.

<About the occurrence of the look-ahead effect and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that the notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area. Specifically, FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 35B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 35C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.
In this example, the MPU 52 specifies that the normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and that the normal pending information is stored in the execution area SAE. I have identified that there is.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal hold information stored in the execution area SAE.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the notice suspension is to be generated, in step S2207, the MPU 52 executes the notice suspension generation processing, and stores the notice suspension information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the sub-side reservation area. area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start pending storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 52 stores the notice pending information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa.
The MPU 62 displays the notice pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 to inform the player of the occurrence of the notice pending.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , a design of a blinking white sphere, which is a notice pending design, is placed on the pedestal B13. Here, as shown in FIG. 35(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display the notice pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. .

Note that in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 does not execute the rendering for the completion of the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 35(C). not created. Also, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for ending the suspension of the advance notice, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 35(D). not created.

FIG. 36 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and the frame buffer when the first hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. 1 is a diagram showing each layer of . Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 36B shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 36C shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them.
Specifically, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the white sphere pattern, which is a normal reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11, The design of the flashing white sphere, which is the notice pending design placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display the normal pending pattern and the advance notice pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3005 is advance notice pending information. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 36, a hold related to the normal reserved design placed on the execution pedestal AB and on the pedestal B11). By using the effect of the time, the expectation level of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 36, the suspension related to the preview suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B12) is notified to the player. It is a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 36(D).

Also, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 receives the first advance notice pending effect command after it is specified that the notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the accumulated display duration time included in this advance notice suspension effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36D, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

In the example of FIG. 36, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for the completion of the special hold, the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 36(C). not created.

<Regarding the flow of processing the normal hold after the look-ahead effect occurs>
FIG. 37 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. 1 is a diagram showing each layer of . Specifically, FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 37B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 37C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them.
Specifically, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending design placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. do. Here, as shown in FIG. 37(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display the normal reserved pattern and the notice reserved pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3005 is advance notice pending information. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the characters "mystery" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect uses the effect of the game cycle based on the hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold related to the normal reserved pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). By doing so, it is an effect for quenching the notice suspension that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 37, the suspension related to the notice suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 37(D).

Also, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 receives the second advance notice pending effect command after it is specified that the notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this advance notice suspension effect command is the same as the display duration of the previous game round. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37D, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the advance notice pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, renders the drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the effect for ending the advance notice pending). drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 will receive the advance notice pending effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, so based on this advance notice pending effect end command, the third The drawing data created in the layer L3 (drawing data relating to the effect for finishing the advance notice suspension) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 does not execute the rendering for the completion of the special hold. not created.

<Regarding the flow of processing the special hold after the pre-reading effect occurs>
In FIG. 38, after it is specified that the advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area, the first pending shift process is executed, and then the first sub-side pending area of the second sub-side pending area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that special hold information is stored in the area; In other words, FIG. 38 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when it is specified that the special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area after the state shown in FIG. , and each layer of a frame buffer. Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 38B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 38C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62, based on the pending display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, is placed on the pedestal B11. is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the white sphere pattern, which is a normal reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11, The design of the flashing white sphere, which is the notice pending design placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3005 is advance notice pending information. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the characters "mystery" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 38, a hold related to the normal reserved design placed on the execution pedestal AB and on the pedestal B11). By using the performance of the time, the degree of expectation of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 38, the suspension related to the preview suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B12) is notified to the player. It is a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 receives the first advance notice pending effect command after it is specified that the notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the accumulated display duration time included in this advance notice suspension effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38D, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has received the second pending command, it executes special pending processing in step S2212A, and stores the special pending information in the free storage area of the sub-side pending area. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start pending storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 52 stores special reservation information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb.
The MPU 62 displays a special pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pending display generating command transmitted from the MPU 52, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the special pending.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the special hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , a pattern of a black sphere, which is a special reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestal B21. Here, as shown in FIG. 38(B), the VDP 65 displays the special reserved design on the display screen G of the design display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. .

In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 does not execute the rendering for the completion of the special hold. not created.

FIG. 39 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. It is a figure which shows . Specifically, FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 39B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 39C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62, based on the pending display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, the black sphere which is the special pending design placed on the pedestal B21 is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 39(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display the normal reserved design, the advance notice reserved design, and the And a special reserved pattern is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the special hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information. In step S3003, a special holding effect determination process is executed, and a special holding effect command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for consuming the special hold based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display characters "If you reach reach, chance!" By displaying the character of the angel who is about to open in the center of the display screen G, the performance for digesting the special hold is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the VDP 65 creates rendering data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby rendering the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 an effect for digesting the special hold. it's shown.

In addition, the VDP 65 stores the data related to the effect for digesting the special hold in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. there is Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, the data related to the effect for the completion of the special hold is stored.

In the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for ending the suspension of the advance notice, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 39(D). Not created (the angel character is in a stationary state without flying around). In other words, the position of the angel remains stationary at the position of the angel when the previous look-ahead effect ended.

Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them. The subsequent flow is the same as the flow in the case of consuming the normal hold after the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 37).

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the special pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, draws the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the effect for finishing the special pending). drawing data). As a result, the layers L1 to L3 of the frame buffer 69 are in the same state as in FIG.
As described above, the position of the angel is in a stationary state at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect. By clearing the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the special reservation digesting effect), the read-ahead effect is restarted without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the symbol display device 36 functions as variable display means for executing variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 25 or the lower working port 26 . Further, in the present reference embodiment, the sound emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as an effect executing means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect.

In addition, in the present reference form, the notice suspension effect determination processing in step S3006 is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25 (establishment of the first opportunity) for a predetermined period (cumulative display duration time). It functions as a first effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect (first effect).
In addition, in this reference form, the special holding effect determination processing of step S3002 is performed during a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 26 (establishment of the second opportunity different from the first opportunity). Secondly, it functions as a second performance means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance (second performance) for quenching the special hold that overlaps with the look-ahead performance and is different from the look-ahead performance.
Then, in the present reference form, the advance notice suspension effect determination processing causes the look-ahead effect to continue to be executed after the end of the effect for digesting the special suspension.
Note that, in the present embodiment, the continuous execution of the first effect is not limited to the state in which the first effect is operated after the end of the second effect. For example, it shall include a non-operating state (stationary state).

According to this, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working hole 25, and the special hold is completed. After the effect for digestion of the special hold is finished, the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In addition, in the present reference form, the notice pending effect determination processing causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the prefetch effect (Angel character is in a stationary state without jumping around), and when the symbol display device 36 is to end the special suspension digestion effect in the special suspension effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 is caused to restart the look-ahead effect. there is

According to this, the advance notice pending effect determination processing causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-reading effect and the special pending effect when the pattern display device 36 is caused to execute a special pending effect in the special pending effect determination processing. Since the pattern display device 36 is caused to resume the read-ahead performance when the pattern display device 36 ends the performance for digestion of the special reservation in the decision processing, the read-ahead performance is interrupted even in the state where the look-ahead performance is being executed. It is possible to execute the effect for consuming the special reservation by pressing the button, and after the effect for consuming the special reservation is finished, the look-ahead effect can be resumed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can surely entertain the player with the look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, in the present reference embodiment, the special pending effect determination processing in step S3002 stores data relating to the prefetch effect in the third layer L3 (first effect layer) of the frame buffer 69, so that the pattern display device 36 is prefetched. The effect (first effect) is executed, and the special hold effect determination processing in step S3002 transfers the data related to the effect for the completion of the special hold to the frame buffer 69 having a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing in the second layer L2 (second effect layer), the pattern display device 36 is caused to execute an effect (second effect) for quenching the special hold.
Further, in the present embodiment, the frame buffer 69 superimposes a plurality of layers (layers L1 to L3) including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority, thereby displaying the image on the pattern display device 36. It functions as image synthesizing means to be displayed.
Then, in the special pending effect determination processing of step S3002, the data related to the special pending effect is transferred to the third layer of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. 2 layer L2.

According to this, the frame buffer 69 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority. On the third layer L3 storing the data related to the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25, the entry of the game ball into the lower operation port 26 in the special holding effect determination processing An image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 on which the data related to the performance for digestion of the special hold based on is superimposed. In the special pending effect determination process, the data related to the special pending effect is stored in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. To overwrite and execute a performance for digestion of a special hold based on the entry of a game ball into a lower operating port 26 even in a state of executing the look-ahead performance based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation port 25.例文帳に追加After the effect for consuming the special hold is completed, the data relating to the effect for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased. can continue to run.

In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side reservation information storage area 543 is information for storing a plurality of pieces of reservation information (sub-side reservation information) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. It functions as a memory means.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) for storing pending information during execution of variable display on the pattern display device 36, and It comprises a first sub-side reservation area SRa and a second sub-side reservation area SRb (a plurality of reservation areas) for storing reservation information in a reservation state.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 serves as information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game ball enters the upper working port 25 or the lower working port 26. Function.
Furthermore, the reservation determination process of step S2002 is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 25, the processing of step S2202 ( (first reservation storage means), and based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 26, the reservation information is stored in the second sub-side reservation area SRb (second reservation area) different from the first sub-side reservation area SRa. The process of step S2203 for storing (second pending storage means) and the pending shift of step S2104 for shifting the pending information stored in the first sub-side pending area SRa and the second sub-side pending area SRb toward the execution area SAE processing (pending shift means).
The pending shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the pending information stored in the second sub-side pending area SRb toward the execution area SAE.

According to this, the reservation shift process preferentially shifts the reservation information stored in the second sub-side reservation area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even in the state of executing the look-ahead effect based on the reservation information stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa, the second sub-side reservation is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 26. It is possible to execute an effect for extinguishing a special hold based on the hold information stored in the area SRb.

In this embodiment, the pending shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the pending information stored in the second sub-side pending area SRb toward the execution area SAE. The holding information stored in SRb may not be preferentially shifted toward the execution area SAE. For example, the holding information stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa and the second sub-side holding area SRb may They may be shifted in order towards the execution area SAE.

In addition, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect based on the reservation information stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 25. In this state, based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26, the performance for digesting the special hold based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb is executed. will lose continuity. According to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1, based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working hole 25, even in a state where the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period, special hold Since it is possible to execute the performance for digestion of the special reservation, and after the completion of the performance for digestion of the special hold, the look-ahead performance can be continuously executed, so that the continuity of the look-ahead performance is not impaired and the player is comfortable. can be played.

In the present embodiment, the first effect is a look-ahead effect. There may be.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second effect is the effect for clearing the special hold. The effect may be such that the image displayed on the display screen G is gradually enlarged. Further, the second effect is not limited to the effect of displaying an image on the pattern display device 36, and may be, for example, the effect of driving a character. In short, the first effect and the second effect may be any effect, and the second effect may be any effect as long as it overlaps with the first effect. Here, in the present embodiment, duplication refers to a state in which the first effect becomes invisible due to the execution of the second effect.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the pending generation process of step S2102 is based on the pending information (sub-side pending information) stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543, and the pending picture associated with this pending information is displayed. It functions as an information reporting means to be displayed on the device 36 .
Then, in the pending pattern generating process of step S2102, the pending pattern is displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing the data related to the pending pattern in the first layer L1 (layer for reserved pattern) having a higher priority than the second layer L2. I am displaying.

According to this, the pending pattern generation process causes the pattern display device 36 to display the pending pattern by storing the data related to the pending pattern in the first layer L1 having a higher priority than the second layer L2. And, when the performance for digesting the special reservation is executed, the reserved pattern displayed on the pattern display device 36 is surely displayed on the pattern display device 36 without being overwritten.

In addition, in the present reference form, the pending pattern is displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing the data related to the pending pattern in the first layer L1 having a higher priority than the second layer L2. .
On the other hand, the information notifying means may cause the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer.
According to this, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing the data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer, so that the first effect is achieved. And when the second performance is executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved design on the variable display means without using a new layer.

In addition, in the present reference form, the second effect means causes the pattern display device 36 to immediately terminate the effect for the completion of the special hold collectively by setting the special hold effect end command in step S3004.
According to this, the second effect means causes the pattern display device 36 to collectively end the effect for consuming the special reserve immediately, so that the effect for consuming the special reserve can be quickly ended.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the advance notice pending effect determination processing in step S3006 is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25, and the data related to the prefetch effect (first effect) is stored in the third stage of the frame buffer 69. By storing in the layer L3 (first effect layer), it functions as a first effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect, and the special holding effect determination processing of step S3002 is the game to the lower operation port 26. Based on the entry of the ball, the data related to the effect (second effect) for digesting the special hold different from the look-ahead effect is transferred to the second layer of the frame buffer 69 having a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing it in L2 (second effect layer), it functioned as a second effect means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect for quenching the special hold.

On the other hand, the advance notice suspension effect determination processing in step S3006 and the special suspension effect determination processing in step S3002 are based on the data related to the look-ahead effect (first effect) and the effect (second effect) for digesting the special suspension. By storing such data in the same layer, the symbol display device 36 may be caused to execute a look-ahead effect and a special hold effect.
In addition, the advance notice suspension effect determination processing in step S3006 and the special suspension effect determination processing in step S3002 are based on the entry of the game ball into the same starting ball entry means, and the symbol display device 36 executes the pre-reading effect and the digestion of the special suspension. You may run the production for.

In this way, the first effect means and the second effect means execute the specific effect on the variable display means by storing the data relating to the specific effect in the specific effect layer based on the establishment of the specific opportunity. It suffices if it functions as a specific effect means for causing
Then, in the present reference embodiment, the suspension generation process in step S2102 is performed by transferring data related to common images (suspended pattern and each pattern row Z1 to Z3) different from the specific effect to the specific effect layer (the second layer L2 and the second layer L2). A common image is displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing it in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the third layer L3).

According to this, in the suspension generation process of step S2102, the data related to the common image (suspended pattern and each symbol row Z1 to Z3) different from the look-ahead effect and the effect for digestion of the special suspension is transferred to the specific effect layer (first Since a common image is displayed on the pattern display device 36 by storing it in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second layer L2 and the third layer L3), the look-ahead effect and special hold are digested. The common image can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the common image displayed on the pattern display device 36 when executing the special presentation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second distribution table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower working port 26 is Compared to the first distribution table referred to when the jackpot type lottery is performed for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning, it is easier to distribute to the "best result". In other words, the effect (second effect) for extinguishing the special hold based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26 is the look-ahead effect (first effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25 ) to the player.

According to this, since the effect for consuming the special hold is more useful to the player than the look-ahead effect, the player pays attention to whether the effect for consuming the special hold is executed during the predetermined period. will do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this reference form, the second effect is more useful to the player than the first effect because it is easy to sort into the "most advantageous result", but the second effect is Any effects may be adopted as the first effect and the second effect as long as the effect is more useful for the player than the first effect.
For example, a first game round based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering section and a second game round based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section are executed in parallel. In a game machine, when a second game round is won or is likely to be won, a second performance is performed in the second game round overlapping the first performance being executed in the first game round. By executing the second effect, the effect may be more useful to the player than the first effect.
Further, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute an electric role game round related to an electric role item opening lottery based on a ball entering a through gate during the opening/closing execution mode, the electric role game round is won or won. When it is likely to happen, the second effect is more useful to the player than the first effect by executing the second effect in the electric role game cycle overlapping with the first effect in the opening/closing execution mode. It may be a direct performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" so as to fly around the entire display screen G, thereby performing a pre-reading effect. was running After the completion of the effect for quenching the special hold, the MPU 62 spreads the angel character holding the signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" over the entire display screen G when continuing to execute the look-ahead effect. A look-ahead effect was executed by displaying on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around. In other words, the look-ahead effect is one type of effect.

On the other hand, the first effect means may cause the variable display means to execute the first effect having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. For example, the MPU 62 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" so as to fly around the entire display screen G, thereby providing a low-expectation look-ahead effect. By causing the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the character "heat" so as to fly around the entire display screen G, a high-expectation look-ahead effect is executed. may

When the variable display means is caused to execute a first effect having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period, the first effect means causes the second effect means to execute the second effect. You may make it change the expectation degree of a 1st production|presentation during an overlap period. For example, the MPU 62 executes a look-ahead effect by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the characters "mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G, and a special effect is displayed. After the performance for quenching the suspension is finished, when the look-ahead performance is to be continued, the pattern is such that the angel character carrying the signboard displaying the characters "heat" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. A look-ahead effect may be executed by displaying on the display device 36 .

According to this, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of the game ball into the upper working hole 25, and the special hold is completed. It is possible to execute the performance for the purpose, and change the degree of expectation of the look-ahead performance during the duplication period during which the performance for consuming the special suspension is executed in the special suspension performance determination processing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 1, even in a state in which the symbol display device 36 is executing a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper working hole 25, does not cause special suspension to be consumed. An effect can be executed, and after the end of the effect for digestion of the special hold, the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The advance notice pending effect determination processing causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-reading effect when the special pending effect determination processing causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the effect for quenching the special pending effect, and the special pending effect determination processing. When the pattern display device 36 is caused to end the performance for digestion of the special reservation in the pattern display device 36, the look-ahead performance is restarted, so even if the look-ahead performance is being executed, the look-ahead performance is interrupted. A performance for digesting the special suspension can be executed, and after the performance for digesting the special suspension is finished, the look-ahead performance can be restarted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can surely entertain the player with the look-ahead effect.

(3) The frame buffer 69 displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by superimposing a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority. On the third layer L3 storing the data related to the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25, the special holding effect determination processing is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation port 26. An image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 on which the data relating to the performance for digesting the special hold is stored. In the special pending effect determination process, the data related to the special pending effect is stored in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. To overwrite and execute a performance for digestion of a special hold based on the entry of a game ball into a lower operating port 26 even in a state of executing the look-ahead performance based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation port 25.例文帳に追加After the effect for consuming the special hold is completed, the data relating to the effect for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased. can continue to run.

(4) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Even in the state of executing the look-ahead effect based on the reservation information stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa, the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 26. It is possible to execute an effect for digesting a special hold based on the hold information stored in the .
(5) The pachinko machine 1, even in a state in which the symbol display device 36 is executing a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper working hole 25, does not cause special suspension to be consumed. Since the performance can be executed and the look-ahead performance can be continuously executed after the performance for digesting the special suspension is finished, the player can comfortably play without impairing the continuity of the look-ahead performance. can.

(6) The pending pattern generation process causes the pattern display device 36 to display the pending pattern by storing the data related to the pending pattern in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. The reserved pattern can be surely displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the pattern display device 36 when executing the performance for consuming the reserved pattern.
(7) The second effect means causes the pattern display device 36 to immediately end the effects for consuming the special reserve all at once, so the effects for consuming the special reserve can be quickly ended.

[Reference Form B]
Hereinafter, reference form B of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.
In the reference form A, the notice pending effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-reading effect (Angel's The character is in a stationary state without jumping around), and when the pattern display device 36 ends the special suspension digestion performance in the special suspension performance determination process, the design display device 36 is made to resume the look-ahead performance. .
On the other hand, in the present reference form, the advance notice effect determination process continues the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the pattern display device 36 is caused to execute the effect for the completion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process. It is different from the reference form A in that it is executed by

In the present reference embodiment, the sound emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute different processes from those in the reference embodiment A described above. Specifically, in the present reference form, the effect pattern determination process is different from that in the reference form A described above. The details of the effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process according to the reference form B of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a production pattern determination process to select the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 in the same manner as in the reference form A described above. It should be noted that, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 52 differs from the reference embodiment A in that after executing the processing of step S3003, the processing of step S3012B is executed.

In step S3012B, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in the pending shift process is advance notice pending information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is advance notice pending information, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S3006 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is not the notice suspension information, it executes the processes after step S3011 described above.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is specified that the advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area of the sub-side suspension area, the MPU 52 performs the special suspension digestion effect in the special suspension effect determination process. Along with executing it, the pre-reading performance is executed in the notice suspension performance determination processing.

<About the flow of digesting the special hold after the occurrence of the look-ahead effect>
FIG. 41 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. It is a figure which shows . In other words, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where the effect for extinguishing the special hold is executed after the state of FIG. Specifically, FIG. 41(A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 41B shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 41C shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62, based on the pending display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the black sphere which is the special pending design placed on the pedestal B21 is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 41(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display the normal reserved design, the advance notice reserved design, And a special reserved pattern is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the special hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information. In step S3003, a special holding effect determination process is executed, and a special holding effect command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for consuming the special hold based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display characters "If you reach reach, chance!" By displaying the character of the angel who is about to open in the center of the display screen G, the performance for digesting the special hold is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 41(C), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby creating an effect for digesting the special hold on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. it's shown.

In addition, the VDP 65 stores the data related to the effect for digesting the special hold in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. there is Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, the data related to the effect for the completion of the special hold is stored.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3012B is advance notice pending information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice pending information in step S3012B. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the characters "mysterious" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold executed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 41, a hold related to the normal reserved design placed on the execution pedestal AB and on the pedestal B11). By using the performance of the time, the degree of expectation of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 41, the suspension related to the preview suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B12) is notified to the player. It is a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 41(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 receives the second advance notice suspension effect command after it is specified that the notice suspension information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this advance notice suspension effect command is the same as the display duration of the previous game round. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

FIG. 42 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. 1 is a diagram showing each layer of . Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 42B shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 42C shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62, based on the pending display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, moves the white sphere, which is the normal pending design, placed on the pedestal B11. is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending design placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. do. Here, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3005 is advance notice pending information. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the characters "mystery" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect uses the effect of the game cycle based on the hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the normal reserved pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). Thus, it is an effect for digesting the notice suspension that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 42, the suspension related to the notice suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 42(D).

Also, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 receives the third advance notice pending effect command after it is specified that the notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the accumulated display duration time included in this advance notice suspension effect command is the same as the sum of the display duration times of the previous and two previous game rounds. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42D, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the advance notice pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, renders the drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the effect for ending the advance notice pending). drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 will receive the notice pending effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, so based on this notice pending effect end command, the third The drawing data created in the layer L3 (drawing data relating to the effect for finishing the advance notice suspension) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 42, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for the completion of the special hold, the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 42(C). not created.

Thus, in the present reference form, the notice pending effect determination process continues the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the pattern display device 36 is caused to execute the special pending effect for digestion in the special pending effect determination process. I am running it.

According to this, the advance notice pending effect determination processing continues to execute the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the pattern display device 36 is caused to execute the effect for consuming the special pending effect in the special pending effect determination processing. The look-ahead effect can be continuously executed regardless of the effect for digestion of the special hold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can entertain the player with the flow of the look-ahead effect.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (1), (3) to (7) in the reference mode A, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(8) In the advance notice pending effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for consuming the special pending effect in the special pending effect determining process. It is possible to continue to execute the look-ahead effect regardless of the effect for digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can entertain the player with the flow of the look-ahead effect.

[Reference Form C]
Reference form C of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the reference form A, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, in step S3004, the special hold effect end command is set, and the display control is performed. The MPU 62 of the device 6 clears the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (the drawing data relating to the effect for digesting the special suspension) based on the special suspension effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. Was.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special pending information, the MPU 52 shifts to the storage area of the sub-side pending area. When the received sub-side pending information is advance notice pending information, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 does not immediately clear the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, which is different from the reference form A. .

In the present reference embodiment, the sound emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute different processes from those in the reference embodiment A described above. Specifically, in the present reference form, the effect pattern determination process is different from that in the reference form A described above. The details of the effect pattern determination process in the present embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process according to the reference form C of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a production pattern determination process to select the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in the hold shift process is special hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special suspension information, in step S3002, the MPU 52 executes special suspension effect determination processing. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines an effect for the end of the special hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the contents of this special holding effect determination processing.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the special pending effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special suspension digesting effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the special suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute an effect for consuming the special hold.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special pending information, it executes the processing after step S3005.
In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is advance notice hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is the notice suspension information, the MPU 52 executes notice suspension effect determination processing in step S3006. In this advance notice suspension effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines an effect (prefetch effect) for ending the advance notice suspension. Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above based on the contents of this notice pending effect determination processing.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice pending effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice pending effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side suspension information stored in the sub-side suspension information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice suspension effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This advance notice pending effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing an effect for ending the advance notice suspension in the pattern display device 36 based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the pattern display device 36 causes the display screen G to display and execute an effect for canceling the advance notice suspension.

In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes display duration accumulation processing. In this display duration accumulation process, the MPU 52 calculates the display duration accumulation time based on the content of the command for variation each time the advance notice pending effect determination process of step S3006 is executed, and stores the accumulated display duration time in the RAM 54. Memorize. In other words, the accumulated display duration time indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the above-described advance notice suspension effect command includes information related to the accumulated display duration time. Therefore, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point when the angel character flies and the subsequent movement by receiving the information related to the accumulated display duration time from the MPU 52 . The initial value of the accumulated display duration time is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

At step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade-out command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special holding effect fade-out command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the special pending effect fade-out command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special holding effect fade-out command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the special suspension effect fade-out command transmitted from the MPU 52, renders the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the special suspension effect effect). is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 toward the periphery.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that it is not the notice suspension information, it sets the notice suspension effect end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice pending effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice pending effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This advance notice pending effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the advance notice pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, draws data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the effect for ending the advance notice pending). to clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes cumulative display duration reset processing. In this display duration cumulative reset process, the MPU 52 substitutes "0" for the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 and resets it.

In step S3004C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the special pending effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special holding effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6, based on the special suspension effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52, renders the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data relating to the effect for finishing the special suspension). to clear.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3013C, or after executing the process of step S3004C, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. Thereafter, the MPU 52 terminates the effect pattern determination process. In other processes, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . Specifically, the MPU 52 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In addition, in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display other than the look-ahead effect.

<About the flow of digesting the special hold after the occurrence of the look-ahead effect>
In FIG. 44, after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the effect for consuming the special hold is terminated, and the effect for consuming the advance notice hold is executed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer in this case. In other words, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where after the state of FIG. 39 in reference form A is reached, the effect for consuming the special hold is terminated and the effect for consuming the advance notice hold is executed. Specifically, FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG. 44B shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 44C shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 3 shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, and executes them.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62, based on the pending display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, is placed on the pedestal B11. is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending design placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. do. Here, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, thereby displaying the normal pending pattern and the advance notice pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62, based on the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 52, a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (see FIG. 3). , the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period begins. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of the patterns. In the example of FIG. 44, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by stop-displaying various symbol combinations on the effective line L as the stop result based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side pending information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side pending area in step S3005 is advance notice pending information. , in step S3006, executes the notice pending effect determination process, and in step S3007, sets the notice pending effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to display and execute an effect for ending the advance notice suspension based on the notice suspension effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 controls the pattern display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the characters "mystery" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. , the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect uses the effect of a game cycle based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 44, a hold related to the normal reserved pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). Thus, it is an effect for quenching the advance notice suspension that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the suspension (in the example of FIG. 44, the suspension associated with the advance notice suspension pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 44(D).

Thereafter, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice suspension information, in step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special suspension effect fade-out command.
Then, based on the special suspension effect fade-out command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 draws the drawing data (for digesting the special suspension) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 44(C). ) is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 toward the periphery.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the process of step S3013C functions as a second effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to fade out the effect for consuming the special hold.
According to this, the process of step S3013C terminates the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 so as to fade out, so that the effect for consuming the special hold is finished without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be made

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in the advance notice suspension effect determination process, and then causes the symbol display device 36 to end the special suspend effect. .
According to this, the process of step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the look-ahead effect in the advance notice suspension effect determination process, and then causes the symbol display device 36 to end the effect for digesting the special suspension. The images of the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 can be changed at the same time without allowing the player to visually recognize the angel character in the state, and the special hold can be canceled without making the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect by ending the effect of.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as (1) to (6) in the reference embodiment A, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(9) The process of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming the special hold by fading out, so that the effect for consuming the special hold can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.
(10) In the process of step S3013C, the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect in the notice suspension effect determination process, and then the symbol display device 36 is caused to end the effect for digesting the special suspension. A look-ahead effect can be executed by terminating the effect for digesting the special hold without remembering.

[Reference form D]
Reference form D of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a game board according to Reference Mode D of the present invention.
45, the present reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment in that the center frame 37 has a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG.
The two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71, and flows down the game area. A stage distribution mechanism 73 for distributing game balls to either an upper stage 71 or a lower stage 72 is provided.

FIG. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 47 is a front view enlarging the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 , the upper stage 71 has a rolling surface 74 on which game balls flowing down the game area roll, and a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2 . A guide path 75 is provided for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36 . The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45). By being distributed to 71 , it reaches the rolling surface 74 .

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to be vertically upward of the upper working port 25 at the lowest position and to rise toward the horizontal left and right sides. This rolling surface 74 is located above the upper working port 25 and has a gently depressed concave portion 741 , and two gently depressed concave portions 741 are positioned on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 so as to be adjacent to the concave portion 741 . and a concave portion 742 .

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2 . The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guideway 75 .
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2 . The lower end of each slope is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball travels in the horizontal left-right direction, and after rolling on the rolling surface 74, it travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that fall to the game area along the . Specifically, the upper stage 71 sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74, the inclination angles of the concave portions 741 and 742, and the like, so that approximately 40% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that enter the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that fall into the game area.

The guide path 75 includes an upper introduction portion 751 into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge portion 752 that discharges and drops the game ball entered from the upper introduction portion 751 into the game area. and Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that a game ball entering the inside of the guide path 75 can be visually recognized.

In addition, the guide path 75 guides the game ball entered in the upper introduction part 751 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides it in the horizontal left direction. A right guide portion 754 for guiding the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction to the lower side of the game board 2 and guiding it in the horizontal right direction, and the right guide portion 754 guides the game ball in the horizontal right direction. A front guide part 755 is provided for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharging and dropping it from a discharge part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the discharge part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operation port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route for entering the guide path 75 wins the upper operation port 25 easier to do.

The lower stage 72 includes a rolling surface 76 for rolling the game ball flowing down the game area, and after guiding the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 76 toward the rear of the game board 2, the game ball is played. and a guide path 77 that guides the board 2 toward the front.

The rolling surface 76 is provided so as to have depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36 . The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45). By being distributed to 72 , it reaches the rolling surface 76 .

The rolling surface 76 has a mountain-shaped portion located above the upper working port 25 and protruding vertically upward, and two valley-shaped portions located on both left and right sides of the mountain-shaped portion and depressed vertically downward. , and is formed to be curved greatly compared to the rolling contact surface 74 of the upper stage 71 . This rolling surface 76 is located above the upper working port 25 (the top of the mountain-shaped portion) and has a gently depressed concave portion 761, and is located at the bottom of the valley-shaped portion and has two gently depressed concave portions. 762.

The concave portion 761 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2 . The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guideway 77 .
Each concave portion 762 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2 . The lower end of each slope is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball travels in the horizontal left-right direction, and after rolling on the rolling surface 76, it travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 761 and enters the guide path 77, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 762. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that fall to the game area along the . Specifically, the lower stage 72 sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 76 and the inclination angles of the concave portion 761 and each concave portion 762 so that approximately 10% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that fall into the game area.

The guide path 77 includes a lower introduction part 771 into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 76 can enter, and a discharge part 772 that discharges and drops the game ball entered from the lower introduction part 771 into the game area. (discharge portion 752). In this reference embodiment, the discharge section 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge section 752 of the upper stage 71 . Here, the lower stage 72 is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that a game ball entering the guide path 77 can be visually recognized. In this reference embodiment, the discharge section 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge section 752 of the upper stage 71, but it does not have to be shared.

In addition, the guide path 77 includes a rear guide portion 773 that guides the game ball entering the lower introduction portion 771 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then drops the game ball toward the bottom of the game board 2 and guides it. After guiding the game ball dropped and guided toward the bottom of the game board 2 by the direction guide part 773 toward the front of the game board 2, it is discharged from the discharge part 772 (discharge part 752) provided in the game area. and a front guide portion 774 (front guide portion 755) for dropping the object. In this reference embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71 . In other words, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 communicates with the right guide portion 754 of the upper stage 71 so that a game ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide portion 754 can be entered. It's becoming In this reference embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71, but they do not have to be shared.
Here, since the discharge part 772 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operation port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route of entering the guide path 77 wins the upper operation port 25 easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 .

The rotating member 78 includes a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as its axial direction, and a second rotating shaft 781 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (on the side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71). A first plate 782, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782, and a second plate 783 to be substantially parallel to the first plate 782 and to the rotation shaft 781. and a third plate 784 fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71).

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so that the rotating shaft 781 penetrates along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781 and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotation shaft 781 . . The first plate-like portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 .
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781 . The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 .
The third plate 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and has one end on the vertically lower side fixed to the rotating shaft 781 . The third plate 784 has a permanent magnet 787 fixed to the right plate surface in the horizontal direction.

The door member 79 is fixed to a rotary shaft 791 rotatably attached to the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 with the horizontal front-rear direction as an axial direction, and to the rotary shaft 791 so as to block the inside of the left guide portion 753 . and a revolving door 792 .
The rotating door 792 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has one end on the vertically upper side fixed to the rotating shaft 791 . This revolving door 792 has a permanent magnet 793 fixed to the left plate surface in the horizontal direction.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73 will be described below.
In the state of FIG. 47, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73 can roll.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and as shown in FIG. 2 Rolls on the plate surface of the plate 783 toward the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 rolling on the plate surface of the second plate 783 toward the horizontal right collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 48(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. This is the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the plate-like portion 785. FIG.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so that the rotation member 78, as shown in FIG. It rotates around the rotating shaft 781 (see the clockwise arrow in the drawing). Further, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
After that, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the game ball BA1 rolls horizontally rightward on the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 49, when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, thereby rotating the first plate of the first plate 782. The end surface of the shaped portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 inclined with respect to the plate surface faces the rotating member 78 side. have in
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 rolling on the upper stage 71 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74 , the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state. It becomes impossible to roll the following game ball BA2. Also, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the board surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates around the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped part 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 is no longer allocated to the upper stage 71.例文帳に追加Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Also, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75 , and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 moves toward the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 . will be exposed inside the

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route to enter the guide path 75, and distributes about 60% of the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into the routes that fall into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to routes entering the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.
The flow of game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71 will be described below. A description of the flow of the game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 is omitted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that enter the guideway.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route to enter the guide path 75 travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751 . As shown in FIG. 50, the game ball BA1 entering the upper introduction portion 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753, and then guided toward the horizontal left direction. Become. The game ball BA1 guided in the horizontal left direction by the left guiding portion 753 collides with the revolving door 792. - 特許庁

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the rotating door. Specifically, FIG. 51(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792, and FIG. 51(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792. .
When the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792, the door member 79 rotates about the rotating shaft 791 as shown in FIG. 51(A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). When the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792 and the door member 79 rotates about the rotating shaft 791, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 moves through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 to the third position. The permanent magnets 787 of the plate 784 will be in close proximity.
Here, the permanent magnets 793 of the revolving door 792 are attached to the revolving door 792 so that when they come close to the permanent magnets 787 of the third plate 784 as the door member 79 rotates, they repel each other.

Therefore, when the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the third plate 784 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 787, so that the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 as shown in FIG. arrow). Further, each of the plates 782 and 783 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792 and the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, the rotating member 78 rotates around the rotating shaft 781 on the second plate 783 and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. engages and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that fall into the game area.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route to fall to the game area falls to the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 moves through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 to the permanent magnet of the third plate 784. 787, the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes leftward in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is , may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 . In addition, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that, among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72, the ratio of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20. %, but may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 (Fig. (See counterclockwise arrow in the middle). Further, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781. When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781, It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding a game ball to the upper stage 71, and guide means for guiding one game ball to the upper stage. A blocking means (second plate 783) for blocking subsequent game balls from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means when guided to the rolling surface 74 of the stage 71. .
According to this, when one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means causes the following game ball to be guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by subsequent game balls. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 serves both as the guide means and the blocking means, but it does not have to serve as both, and the guiding means and the blocking means may be separate bodies.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 , the blocking means causes the following game ball to roll on the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Although guidance to the surface 74 is prevented, when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the following game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Guidance to the moving surface 74 may be blocked.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 , the blocking means causes the following game ball to roll on the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Although guidance to the surface 74 is blocked, for example, based on other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time, the subsequent game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. may prevent you from doing so.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 (first stage) and a lower stage 72 (second stage) different from the upper stage 71 . The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 . By guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 , the blocking means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.
According to this, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 so that the following game ball is guided by the guiding means. Since the game ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player is prevented from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even in this case, the following motion of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 can be enjoyed.

In this reference embodiment, the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 so that the guide means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Although it is blocked, for example, guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means may be prevented by guiding the game ball to the game area. In short, the blocking means only needs to be able to prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, and the stage does not have to be provided with the lower stage 72 .

In addition, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to routes that enter the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are placed into the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area. As described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route to enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls to the game area. It is configured to distribute to the falling route. In other words, in this reference embodiment, the upper stage 71 is a stage more advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72 .
According to this, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the following game ball. is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, so the player can enjoy the motion of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without worry.

In this reference embodiment, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route to enter the guide path 75, and about 60% , the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the guide path 77 as described above. It is configured such that the game balls are distributed to the incoming ball route and about 90% of the game balls are distributed to the falling route to the game area, but a distribution rate different from this may be set.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper stage 71 is set as a stage that is advantageous to the player compared to the lower stage 72, but is set as a stage that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the lower stage 72. Alternatively, the distribution rate may be set to be the same as that of the lower stage 72 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the blocking means includes a blocking state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) in which the guidance means prevents the following game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a guiding state. and a non-blocking state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the subsequent game ball is not blocked from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by means. The two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the blocking means between the blocking state and the non-blocking state. This stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.
According to this, the two-stage stage 7 is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means between the blocking state and the non-blocking state. When guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guidance means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. When more than one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means may be switched to the blocking state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. For example, , the blocking means may be switched to the blocking state based on other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the rotating door 792 .
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means to switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state. The movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 can be enjoyed further.

In this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the rotating door 792. For example, the blocking means may be switched to the non-blocking state by using a game ball distributed to a route that falls into the game area. In short, the stage distribution mechanism 73 should switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, thereby switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state. . Specifically, the stage distribution mechanism 73 causes the subsequent game ball BA2 different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means to collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, The blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, thereby switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state. can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 contacts a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, thereby switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state. 782 is provided with a second plate-like portion 786 (contact means). This contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means. Specifically, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the ratio of the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. is set to about 20%.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 has a contact means that switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, The contacting means is arranged at a position where it contacts a part (about 20%) of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. , pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 moves the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 to the left guide portion 753 by colliding the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means with the rotary door 792 . The permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is approached through an opening 756 formed in the second plate 784 to switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive forces of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can do.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are in the first guidance state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71, and only in the lower stage 72. It has a second guiding state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) for guiding the game ball, and functions as a stage guiding means for guiding the game ball to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 . This stage guiding means has a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) for switching the stage guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are provided with the stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 between the first guidance state and the second guidance state, Since the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches between a first guidance state in which game balls are guided only to the upper stage 71 and a second guidance state in which game balls are guided only to the lower stage 72, the player can Attention will be paid to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 . In addition, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are switched to the second induction state (first induction state), so that the subsequent game balls are transferred to the upper stage 71 ( Since it is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is hindered by the following game balls. can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the passage into which the game balls flowing down the game area are introduced is a two-stage stage having an upper stage 71 (first passage) and a lower stage 72 (second passage). Although the stage 7 is described as an example, it may be applied to channels other than this. For example, the first flow path and the second flow path may be an accessory such as a croon, or may be a flow path leading to a big prize opening, a V prize opening, or the like.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) When one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, so that the following game is played by the guiding means. Since the ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player is prevented from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even if there is, the movement of subsequent game balls guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 can be enjoyed.

(3) The game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball, and the upper stage 71 can: Since this stage is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.
(4) The two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state. Since the blocking means is switched to the blocking state when guided to the rolling surface 74 of 71, the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means to switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state, so that the player can move the upper stage by the guiding means. The movement of the game ball guided to 71 can be enjoyed further.
(6) The stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, thereby switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state. It is possible to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

(7) The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. is disposed at a position where it contacts a part (about 20%) of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Attention is paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(8) The stage distribution mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive forces of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can be done.

(9) The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 between the first guidance state and the second guidance state. Since the minute mechanism 73 switches between the first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and the second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, the player can Attention will be paid to the state of plate 782 and second plate 783 . In addition, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are switched to the second induction state (first induction state), so that the subsequent game balls are transferred to the upper stage 71 ( Since it is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is hindered by the following game balls. can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, a game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75 . A state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first game state, and a game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Assuming that the state is the second game state, the second game state is when only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction portion 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 includes guide means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation opening 25) that gives profit to the player. I have.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first game state and the second game state that provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference embodiment, the second game state provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It may be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, or it may be a game state that gives the player the same benefits as the first game state.

Considering the invention according to the present embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first game ball ( Function as second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is for the second game ball (game ball BA2) that was shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. fulfills a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786), it functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is operated by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball (game ball BA2) through the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as limiting means for limiting the occurrence of game state 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can be entered into the upper introduction part 751, and the guide path 75 provides the player with a profit. Since the game ball entering the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operation opening 25, the player can receive a profit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 is based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, the second plate 782 and the second plate 783 Since the occurrence of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. You can certainly limit the conditions that can occur.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) that restricts the generation of the second game state in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ) and an unrestricted state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the occurrence of the second game state. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the restricted state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the non-restricted state is generated. state is switched.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 performs the first game Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second game state during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786, among the second game balls, only part of the game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game balls BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball. and the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and whether or not to generate the second game state when the sensor detects the game ball. lottery, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. You may make it guide|induce, and you may make it discharge|eject to a game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is in a predetermined area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 782) in the game area. 783, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.). When a game state is generated and the state generating lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When the game ball is detected in , the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When the ball is detected, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to enter the first game state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the ball is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 . A game ball existing in the area of the created gap may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 allows the game ball BA2 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state to fall within a predetermined area (rolling of the lower stage 72) in the game area. the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, etc.). The first game state may be generated when the state generation lottery executed based on the passage is won, and the first game state may not be generated when the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, the first game state generation means may set the state generation lottery winning as the establishment of a specific condition, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter a big winning opening, V winning opening, or the like. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 formed a flow path leading to the upper working port 25 .
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first game state and the second game state may be a configuration different from the configuration for switching each channel of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 . For example, the flow path leading to the special winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operation opening, and the flow path leading to the through gate may be switched. , It may be configured to switch each flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings, or to switch the flow path leading to the upper working opening and the flow path leading to the lower working opening. may be configured to switch between. Also, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) functions as a game ball guiding means. do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 guides the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state (the second 2 plate 783 standing state) and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state have. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-like portion 786, The game ball is switched to non-induction state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guidance state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 is the first When the game state is generated, the state is switched to the game ball non-induction state, so the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the generation of the first game state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ a nail, various members (accessories) such as a windmill, a center frame, a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball, and the like. Also, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is a predetermined ball in the game area. Second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through the region (region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and contacting and displacing the first game ball functioning as
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) shot from the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state to reach a predetermined area in the game area. (The area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and displaced by coming into contact with the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as first game state generating means for generating the first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 provide the player with the first profit (approximately 40% of the game balls enter the guide path 75) with the first game balls that have generated the second game state. route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73 guides the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71) to give the second game ball that has caused the first game state. The player is guided to a second profit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route to enter the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71 that provides the player with the first profit, and swing the stage. The minute mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that has caused the first game state to the lower stage 72 that provides the player with a second profit different from the first profit. You will pay attention to the guidance destination of

Further, in this reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751) 2, the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 is the first When a second condition (entering the lower introduction part 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is, when the first condition is satisfied, the upper introduction part that gives the first profit 751 and guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, the second profit is given when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower introduction portion 771, the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are located in the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from.

According to this, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771 Since they are ejected to another area, the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to another area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, when the upper stage 71 satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751), the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as the first profit giving area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit, and the lower stage 72 fulfills the second condition (lower introduction part 771 When the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 enters the second profit ball entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit It functioned as a second profit-giving area that makes the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have configurations different from those of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 . For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, a through gate, or the like, and any area may be used as long as it can give a profit to a player. . Also, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

[Reference Form E]
Hereinafter, reference form E of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of a game board according to Reference Mode E of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the center frame 37 has the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
On the other hand, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the center frame 37 is different from the reference embodiment D in that the center frame 37 is provided with a two-stage stage 7E provided in the area below the pattern display device 36. different.

The two-stage stage 7E includes an upper stage 71E arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71E, and flows down the game area. A stage distribution mechanism 73E for distributing game balls to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 is provided.

FIG. 54 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 55 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the upper stage 71E has a rolling surface 74 on which game balls flowing down the game area roll, and a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. A guide path 75E for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36 . The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53). It reaches the rolling surface 74 by being distributed to 71E.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to be vertically upward of the upper working port 25 at the lowest position and to rise toward the horizontal left and right sides. This rolling surface 74 is located above the upper working port 25 and has a gently depressed concave portion 741 , and two gently depressed concave portions 741 are positioned on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 so as to be adjacent to the concave portion 741 . and a concave portion 742 .

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2 . The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guideway 75E.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2 . The lower end of each slope is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball travels in the horizontal left-right direction, and after rolling on the rolling surface 74, travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75E, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that fall to the game area along the . Specifically, the upper stage 71E sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74, the inclination angles of the concave portions 741 and 742, and the like, so that approximately 40% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that enter the guide path 75E, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that fall into the game area.

The guide path 75E includes an upper introduction portion 751 into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge portion 752 that discharges and drops the game ball entered from the upper introduction portion 751 into the game area. and Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that a game ball entering the guide path 75E can be visually recognized.

In addition, the guide path 75E guides the game ball entering the upper introduction part 751 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides it in the horizontal left direction. A right guide portion 754 for guiding the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction to the lower side of the game board 2 and guiding it in the horizontal right direction, and the right guide portion 754 guides the game ball in the horizontal right direction. A front guide part 755 is provided for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharging and dropping it from a discharge part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the discharge part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operation port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route of entering the guide path 75E wins the upper operation port 25 easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73E has a rotating member 78E provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E.

The rotating member 78E includes a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as its axial direction, and a second rotating shaft 781 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (on the side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E). A first plate 782, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782, and a second plate 783 to be substantially parallel to the first plate 782 and to the rotation shaft 781. and a third plate 784E fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753E side of the upper stage 71E).

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so that the rotating shaft 781 penetrates it along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781 and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotation shaft 781 . . The first plate-like portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 .
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781 . The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 .
The third plate 784E is formed in a rectangular plate shape and has one end on the vertically lower side fixed to the rotating shaft 781 . The third plate 784E has a projecting portion 788E formed on the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction. The projecting portion 788E is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape having a longitudinal direction in the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73E will be described below.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53), and as shown in FIG. 2 Rolls on the plate surface of the plate 783 toward the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 rolling on the plate surface of the second plate 783 toward the horizontal right collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 56(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. This is the state immediately after the game ball collides with the shaped portion 785 .
When the game ball collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates around the rotation shaft 781, so the rotation member 78E rotates as shown in FIG. It rotates around the axis 781 (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Further, each of the plates 783 and 784E rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
After that, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the game ball rolls horizontally rightward on the surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 57, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E on the rotating member 78E side engage to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 inclined with respect to the plate surface faces the rotating member 78E. have in
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 rolling on the upper stage 71E is distributed to the upper stage 71E.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the plate surface reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E. It becomes impossible to roll the following game ball BA2. Also, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78E rotates around the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 is no longer distributed to the upper stage 71E. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784E is close to the left guide portion 753E of the guide path 75E, and the protruding portion 788E of the third plate 784E is located near the opening 756E (see FIGS. 54 and 55) formed in the left guide portion 753E. ) to the inside of the left guiding portion 753E.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71E distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route to enter the guide path 75E, and distributes about 60% of the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into the routes that fall into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route to enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are put into the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.
The flow of game balls distributed to each route of the upper stage 71E will be described below. A description of the flow of the game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 is omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that enter the guideway.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route to enter the guide path 75E travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751. - 特許庁As shown in FIG. 58, the game ball entering the upper introduction portion 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753E, and then guided toward the horizontal left direction. . The game ball BA1 guided in the horizontal left direction by the left guide portion 753E collides with the projecting portion 788E.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the projecting portion. Specifically, FIG. 59(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the projecting portion 788E, and FIG. 59(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the projecting portion 788E. is.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the protruding portion 788E, the protruding portion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical cylinder shape whose long axis direction is the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E. , the game ball BA1 is flipped vertically upward. As a result, the third plate 784E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 as shown in FIGS. 59(B), see counterclockwise direction arrow). Further, each of the plates 782 and 783 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the protruding portion 788E, the rotating member 78E rotates around the rotating shaft 781. When the rotating member 78E rotates around the rotating shaft 781, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the rolling surface of the lower stage 72 76 engages and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that fall into the game area.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route to fall to the game area falls to the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 as shown in FIG. In this case, the game ball BA1 does not collide with the projecting portion 788E, so the rotating member 78E does not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes leftward in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 are distributed to the first It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the plate 782 . In addition, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that, among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72, the ratio of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20. %, but may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 (Fig. (See counterclockwise arrow in the middle). Further, each plate 783, 784E rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and rotates about the rotating shaft 781, the rotating member 78E rotates around the rotating shaft 781. It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73E causes the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means to collide with the projecting portion 788E, thereby moving the third plate 784E vertically upward. By jumping up, the blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the projecting portion 788E. Attention is paid to whether or not the plate 784E is flipped vertically upward. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (1) to (7) and (9) in the reference embodiment D, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(10) The stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the projecting portion 788E. It will be noted whether or not is flipped vertically upward. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, a game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75E. A state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first game state, and a game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E. Assuming that the state is the second game state, in the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71E) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction portion 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 includes guide means (guide path 75E) for guiding the game ball that enters the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation opening 25) that provides a profit to the player. I have it.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first game state and the second game state that provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference embodiment, the second game state provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It may be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, or it may be a game state that gives the player the same benefits as the first game state.

Considering the invention according to the present embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first game ball ( It functions as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is for the second game ball (game ball BA2) that was shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. fulfills a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786), it functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is generated by the second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as limiting means for limiting the occurrence of game state 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can be entered into the upper introduction part 751, and the guide path 75E provides the player with a profit. Since the game ball entering the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operation opening 25, the player can receive a profit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 is based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, the second plate 782 and the second plate 783 Since the occurrence of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. You can certainly limit the conditions that can occur.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) that restricts the generation of the second game state in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ) and an unrestricted state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the occurrence of the second game state. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the restricted state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the non-restricted state is generated. state is switched.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 performs the first game Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second game state during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786, among the second game balls, only part of the game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game balls BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball. and the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and whether or not to generate the second game state when the sensor detects the game ball. lottery, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. You may make it guide|induce, and you may make it discharge|eject to a game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is in a predetermined area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 782) in the game area. 783, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.). When a game state is generated and the state generating lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When the game ball is detected in , the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When the ball is detected, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to enter the first game state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the ball is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 . A game ball existing in the area of the created gap may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 allows the game ball BA2 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state to fall within a predetermined area (the rolling motion of the lower stage 72) in the game area. the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, etc.). The first game state may be generated when the state generation lottery executed based on the passage is won, and the first game state may not be generated when the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Incidentally, the first game state generation means may set the state generation lottery winning as the establishment of a specific condition, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large winning opening, V winning opening, or the like. .

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71</b>E and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper working port 25 .
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first game state and the second game state may be a configuration different from the configuration for switching each channel of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 . For example, the flow path leading to the special winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operation opening, and the flow path leading to the through gate may be switched. , It may be configured to switch each flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings, or to switch the flow path leading to the upper working opening and the flow path leading to the lower working opening. may be configured to switch between. Also, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) functions as a game ball guiding means. do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 guides the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state (the second 2 plate 783 standing state) and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state have. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-like portion 786, The game ball is switched to non-induction state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guidance state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 is the first When the game state is generated, the state is switched to the game ball non-induction state, so the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the generation of the first game state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ a nail, various members (accessories) such as a windmill, a center frame, a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball, and the like. Also, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is a predetermined ball in the game area. Second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through the region (region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and contacting and displacing the first game ball functioning as
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73E allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state to reach a predetermined area in the game area. (The area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and displaced by coming into contact with the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as first game state generating means for generating the first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 provide the player with the first profit (approximately 40% of the game balls enter the guide path 75E) with the first game balls that have caused the second game state. route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73E guides the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71E), and the stage distribution mechanism 73E causes the second game ball that has caused the first game state to be given to the player. The player is guided to a second profit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route to enter the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71E that provides the player with the first profit, and swing the stage. The minute mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that has caused the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. You will pay attention to the guidance destination of

Further, in this reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751) 2, the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E is the first When a second condition (entering the lower introduction part 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is, when the first condition is satisfied, the first profit is given to the upper introduction part 751 and guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E, the second profit is given when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower introduction portion 771, the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are located in the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from.

According to this, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771 Since they are ejected to another area, the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to another area.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, when the upper stage 71E satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751), the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as the first profit giving area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit, and the lower stage 72 fulfills the second condition (lower introduction part 771 Entering the second profit ball area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit to the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E when the condition is satisfied. It functioned as a second profit-giving area that makes the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have configurations different from those of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 . For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, a through gate, or the like, and any area may be used as long as it can give a profit to a player. . Also, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

[Reference form F]
Reference form F of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board according to Reference Mode F of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the center frame 37 has the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
On the other hand, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the center frame 37 is different from the reference embodiment D in that it has a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the pattern display device 36. different.

The two-stage stage 7F includes an upper stage 71F arranged vertically above (on the side of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71F, and flowing down the game area. A stage distribution mechanism 73F for distributing game balls to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 is provided.

FIG. 62 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 63 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the upper stage 71F has a rolling surface 74 on which game balls flowing down the game area roll, and a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. A guide path 75F is provided for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have depth between the game area and the pattern display device 36 . The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61). It reaches the rolling surface 74 by being distributed to 71F.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to be vertically upward of the upper working port 25 at the lowest position and to rise toward the horizontal left and right sides. This rolling surface 74 is located above the upper working port 25 and has a gently depressed concave portion 741 , and two gently depressed concave portions 741 are positioned on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 so as to be adjacent to the concave portion 741 . and a concave portion 742 .

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2 . The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guideway 75F.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2 . The lower end of each slope is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball travels in the horizontal left-right direction, and after rolling on the rolling surface 74, travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 and enters the guide path 75F, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that fall to the game area along the . Specifically, the upper stage 71F sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74, the inclination angles of the concave portions 741 and 742, and the like, so that approximately 40% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that enter the guide path 75F, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the routes that fall into the game area.

The guide path 75F includes an upper introduction portion 751 into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and a discharge portion 752 that discharges and drops the game ball entered from the upper introduction portion 751 into the game area. and Here, the upper stage 71F is made of a transparent (or semi-transparent) synthetic resin so that a game ball entering the inside of the guide path 75F can be visually recognized.

In addition, the guide path 75F guides the game ball that has entered the upper stage introduction part 751 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides it in the horizontal left direction. A right guide portion 754 for guiding the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction to the lower side of the game board 2 and then guiding it in the horizontal right direction, and the right guide portion 754 guides the game ball in the horizontal right direction. A front guide part 755 is provided for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then ejecting and dropping it from an ejection part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the discharge part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operation port 25, the game ball discharged into the game area through the route of entering the guide path 75F wins the upper operation port 25 easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73F has a rotating member 78F provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78F includes a rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as its axial direction, and a second rotating shaft 781F fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (on the side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F). It has a first plate 782 and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782 .

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so that the rotating shaft 781F penetrates along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781F and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotation shaft 781F. . The first plate-like portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73F will be described below.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61), and as shown in FIG. 2 Rolls on the plate surface of the plate 783 toward the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 rolling on the plate surface of the second plate 783 toward the horizontal right collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 64 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 64, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the side of the rotating member 78F engage to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 inclined with respect to the plate surface faces the rotating member 78F. have in
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 rolling on the upper stage 71F is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the plate surface reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F. It becomes impossible to roll the following game ball BA2. Also, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 is no longer assigned to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.

Then, as described above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the routes that enter the guide path 75F, and about 60% of the game balls are put into the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route to enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes leftward in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a game ball distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 . In addition, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that, among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72, the ratio of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20. %, but may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation axis 781F, so the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation axis 781F (see counterclockwise direction arrow). Also, the plate 783 rotates as the rotation shaft 781F rotates.
When the game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates around the rotating shaft 781F. It engages the rolling surface 76 of the stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78F returns to the state shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, the same functions and effects as (1) to (4), (6), (7), and (9) in the reference embodiment D can be obtained.

Here, in this reference embodiment, a game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75F. A state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first game state, and a game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. Assuming that the state is the second game state, in the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction portion 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has guide means (guide path 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation opening 25) that gives profit to the player. I have it.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first game state and the second game state that provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference embodiment, the second game state provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It may be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, or it may be a game state that gives the player the same benefits as the first game state.

Considering the invention according to the present embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first game ball ( Function as second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is for the second game ball (game ball BA2) that was shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. fulfills a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786), it functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is operated by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball (game ball BA2) through the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as limiting means for limiting the occurrence of game state 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can be entered into the upper introduction part 751, and the guide path 75F provides the player with a profit. Since the game ball entering the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operation opening 25, the player can receive a profit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 is based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, the second plate 782 and the second plate 783 Since the occurrence of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. You can certainly limit the conditions that can occur.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) that restricts the generation of the second game state in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ) and an unrestricted state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the occurrence of the second game state. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the restricted state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786, the non-restricted state is generated. state is switched.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 performs the first game Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second game state during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786, among the second game balls, only part of the game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game balls BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so that the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball. and the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 were displaced by the driving force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and whether or not to generate the second game state when the sensor detects the game ball. lottery, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. You may make it guide|induce, and you may make it discharge|eject to a game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is in a predetermined area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 782) in the game area. 783, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.). When a game state is generated and the state generating lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When the game ball is detected in , the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When the ball is detected, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to enter the first game state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the ball is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 . A game ball existing in the area of the created gap may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 allows the game ball BA2 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state to fall within a predetermined area (rolling of the lower stage 72) in the game area. the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, etc.). The first game state may be generated when the state generation lottery executed based on the passage is won, and the first game state may not be generated when the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped part 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, the first game state generation means may set the state generation lottery winning as the establishment of a specific condition, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter a big winning opening, V winning opening, or the like. .

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71</b>F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper working port 25 .
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first game state and the second game state may be a configuration different from the configuration for switching each channel of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 . For example, the flow path leading to the special winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operation opening, and the flow path leading to the through gate may be switched. , It may be configured to switch each flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings, or to switch the flow path leading to the upper working opening and the flow path leading to the lower working opening. may be configured to switch between. Also, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) functions as a game ball guiding means. do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 guides the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state (the second 2 plate 783 standing state) and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state have. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated by the second plate-like portion 786, The game ball is switched to non-induction state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guidance state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the second plate-like portion 786 is the first When the game state is generated, the state is switched to the game ball non-induction state, so the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the generation of the first game state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ a nail, various members (accessories) such as a windmill, a center frame, a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball, and the like. Also, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is a predetermined ball in the game area. Second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through the region (region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and contacting and displacing the first game ball functioning as
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73F allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state to move to a predetermined area in the game area. (The area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and displaced by coming into contact with the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as first game state generating means for generating the first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 provide the player with the first profit (approximately 40% of the game balls enter the guide path 75F) with the first game balls that have caused the second game state. route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73F guides the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71F), and the stage distribution mechanism 73F causes the second game ball that caused the first game state to be given to the player. The player is guided to a second profit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from profit (about 10% of the game balls are allocated to the route to enter the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71F that provides the player with the first profit, and the stage shakes. The minute mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that has caused the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. You will pay attention to the guidance destination of

Further, in this reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751) 2, the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F is the first When a second condition (entering the lower introduction part 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is, when the first condition is satisfied, the first profit is given to the upper introduction part 751 and guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F, the second profit is given when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower introduction portion 771, the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are located in the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from.

According to this, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771 Since they are ejected to another area, the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to another area.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, when the upper stage 71F satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751), the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as the first profit giving area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit, and the lower stage 72 fulfills the second condition (lower introduction part 771 Entering the second profit ball area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit to the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F when the condition is satisfied. It functioned as a second profit-giving area that makes the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have configurations different from those of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 . For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, a through gate, or the like, and any area may be used as long as it can give a profit to a player. . Also, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

[Reference form G]
Reference form G of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of a game board according to Reference Mode G of the present invention.
In the reference form F, the center frame 37 has a two-stage stage 7F provided in the lower area of the pattern display device 36. As shown in FIG.
On the other hand, in this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the center frame 37 is different from the reference embodiment D in that the center frame 37 is provided with a two-stage stage 7G provided in the area below the pattern display device 36. different.

The two-stage stage 7G includes an upper stage 71F arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71F, and a game area. A stage distribution mechanism 73G for distributing game balls to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 is provided.

FIG. 66 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 67 is a front view enlarging the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the stage distribution mechanism 73G has a rotating member 78G provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78G includes a rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as its axial direction, and a second rotating shaft 781F fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (on the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F). A first plate 782G, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781F so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782G, and a second plate 783 to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782G and to the rotation shaft 781F. A fourth plate 789G is fixed on the horizontal front side and fixed on the opposite side of the second plate 783 across the rotation shaft 781F.

The first plate 782G is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so that the rotating shaft 781F penetrates along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782G has a first plate-like portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781F. The first plate-like portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F.
The fourth plate 789G is formed in a rectangular plate shape and has one end on the left side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781F.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73G will be described below.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 to reach the stage distribution mechanism 73G (see arrow A in FIG. 65), and as shown in FIG. 2 Rolls on the plate surface of the plate 783 toward the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 rolling on the plate surface of the second plate 783 toward the horizontal right collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 68, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the side of the rotating member 78G are engaged to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 inclined with respect to the plate surface faces the rotating member 78G. have in
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 rolling on the upper stage 71F is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the plate surface reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G. It becomes impossible to roll the following game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 is no longer assigned to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F.

Then, as described above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the routes that enter the guide path 75F, and about 60% of the game balls are put into the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route to enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the fourth plate 789G protrudes vertically downward. The game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 and the rotating shaft 781F collides with the fourth plate 789G.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G, the fourth plate 789G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F, so the rotating member 78G releases the engagement between the first plate-like portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. direction around the rotating shaft 781F (see the counterclockwise direction arrow in the figure). Also, the plate 783 rotates as the rotation shaft 781F rotates.
When the game ball collides with the fourth plate 789G and rotates about the rotating shaft 781F, the rotating member 78G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F on the second plate 783 and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. engages and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78G returns to the state shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73G switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means. It has 4 plates 789G (contact means). This contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts all the game balls among the following game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guide means.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73G has a contact means that switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, The contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts all of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guide means. The movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (4), (6), and (9) in the reference embodiment D, the following actions and effects can be obtained. be able to.
(11) The stage distribution mechanism 73G has contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means. is arranged at a position where all of the following game balls, which are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, come into contact with each other. You can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to 71F without worry.

Here, in this reference embodiment, a game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75F. A state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first game state, and a game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. Assuming that the state is the second game state, in the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction portion 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has guide means (guide path 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation opening 25) that gives profit to the player. I have it.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first game state and the second game state that provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference embodiment, the second game state provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It may be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, or it may be a game state that gives the player the same benefits as the first game state.

Considering the invention according to the present embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are the first game ball ( Function as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the fourth plate 789G is set so that the second game ball (game ball BA2) shot from the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition. (when the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G), it functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is operated by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball (game ball BA2) through the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as limiting means for limiting the occurrence of game state 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second game state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can be entered into the upper introduction part 751, and the guide path 75F provides the player with a profit. Since the game ball entering the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operation opening 25, the player can receive a profit when the second game state occurs. In addition, the second plate 783 is based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, the second plate 782G and the second plate 783 Since the occurrence of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F).

According to this, the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. You can certainly limit the conditions that can occur.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) that restricts the generation of the second game state in the first plate 782G and the second plate 783. ) and an unrestricted state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 do not restrict the occurrence of the second game state. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, it is switched to the restricted state, and when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G, it is switched to the non-restricted state. are switching.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G. Since it switches to the non-restricted state when it is generated, the second game state can be generated without restricting the generation of the second game state with the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second game state with the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the game state.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the first game ball, so the first plate 782G and the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state by displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1. In other words, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting the game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects the game ball, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and whether or not to generate the second game state when the game ball is detected by this sensor lottery, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball existing in the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. You may make it guide|induce, and you may make it discharge|eject to a game area.

In this way, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is a predetermined area (the first plate 782G and the second plate 782G and the second plate) in the game area. 783, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.). When a game state is generated and the state generating lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the structure of the fourth plate 789G can be simplified. can do.

Further, in this reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the driving force of the game ball BA2.
Alternatively, the fourth plate 789G may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F, and when the sensor detects the game ball Alternatively, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F. A lottery may be executed to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. At this time, if the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F is present. The game ball that is being held may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the fourth plate 789G allows the game ball BA2 shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state to reach a predetermined area (the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F) in the game area. and the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37). Alternatively, the first game state may be generated and the first game state may not be generated when the state generating lottery is not won.
According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won. The player will pay attention to the results of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, the first game state generation means may set the state generation lottery winning as the establishment of a specific condition, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter a big winning opening, V winning opening, or the like. .

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71</b>F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper working port 25 .
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first game state and the second game state may be a configuration different from the configuration for switching each channel of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 . For example, the flow path leading to the special winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operation opening, and the flow path leading to the through gate may be switched. , It may be configured to switch each flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings, or to switch the flow path leading to the upper working opening and the flow path leading to the lower working opening. may be configured to switch between. Also, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area while the second game state is occurring. area) and another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F).

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, so that the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 guides the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state (the second 2 plate 783 standing state) and a game ball non-guiding state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state have. Then, when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the game ball guidance state, and when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G, the game ball Switching to the non-inductive state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guidance state when the second game state is generated with the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and the first game with the fourth plate 789G Since the state is switched to the game ball non-induction state when the state is generated, the generation of the second game state with the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the generation of the first game state is not restricted. , the occurrence of the second game state in the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second game state can be reliably restricted.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ a nail, various members (accessories) such as a windmill, a center frame, a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball, and the like. Also, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) shot by the shooting handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is a predetermined ball in the game area. Second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through the region (region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) and contacting and displacing the first game ball functioning as
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73G allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) shot by the shooting handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state to move to a predetermined area in the game area. (Rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, the area of the gap formed between the rotating shaft 781F) passes through, based on contact with the second game ball and displaced, the first game state It functions as a first game state generating means for generating .
Then, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 give the player the first profit (approximately 40% of the game balls enter the guideway 75F) with the first game balls that have generated the second game state. route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73G guides the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71F), and the stage distribution mechanism 73G causes the second game ball that has caused the first game state to be given to the player. The player is guided to a second profit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route to enter the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71F that provides the player with the first profit, and the stage shakes. The minute mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that has caused the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. You will pay attention to the guidance destination of

Further, in this reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751) 2, the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G is the first When a second condition (entering the lower introduction part 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 is, when the first condition is satisfied, the first profit is given to the upper introduction part 751 and guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G, the second profit is given when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower introduction portion 771, the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are located in the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from.

According to this, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction part 751 and the lower introduction part 771 Since they are ejected to another area, the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to another area.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first game state. A state in which a game ball exists, in other words, a state in which a game ball can flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, when the upper stage 71F satisfies the first condition (entering the upper introduction portion 751), the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 function as the first profit giving area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit, and the lower stage 72 fulfills the second condition (lower introduction part 771 Entering ball), the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G enters the second profit entering area (lower introduction part 771) to give the second profit. It functioned as a second profit-giving area that makes the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have configurations different from those of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 . For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, a through gate, or the like, and any area that can give a profit to a player can be used. . Also, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory. In addition, the first game state and the second game state may be any game state, for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) as the first game state, specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second game state.

[Reference form H]
Reference form H of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the reference form H of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71. I was prepared.
On the other hand, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73H includes a rotating member 78, a door member 79, and an obstruction means 70 that prevents game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H. It is different from the reference form D in this point.

The baffle means 70 includes a baffle plate 701 provided at the upper left position of the rotating shaft 781 of the rotating member 78 , a baffle plate driving section 702 for driving the baffle plate 701 , and a rotation detection sensor 703 for detecting the rotation state of the rotating member 78 . and

The baffle plate 701 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. The baffle plate 701 advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to prevent the game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H and to prevent the game balls from reaching the inside of the game board 2. By retreating and being buried in the game board 2, it has a non-interfering state that does not interfere with the game balls reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
Also, the baffle plate 701 is connected to a baffle plate driving section 702 mounted on the back side of the game board 2 . The baffle plate 701 is driven by a baffle plate driving section 702 so as to be set to either an obstructing state or a non-obstructing state.

The rotation detection sensor 703 is attached to the horizontal rear side of the rotary shaft 781 (the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71). The rotation detection sensor 703 detects two rotation states of the second plate 783, namely, the upright state and the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783. As shown in FIG.

<Electrical configuration of sound emission control device>
FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 70, the sound emission control device 5H includes a sound emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the sound emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 are combined into a chip.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. An input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotating member 78 . Output ports of the MPU 52 are connected to various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 , the speaker unit 125 and the display control device 6 . Also, the output port of the MPU 52 is connected to a baffle plate driving section 702 that causes the baffle plate 701 to project and retract.
Note that the sound emission control board 51 has a driver circuit. The MPU 52 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate driving section 702 to cause the baffle plate 701 to protrude.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73H will be described below.
The MPU 52 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) causes the rotation detection sensor 703 to detect two rotation states of the second plate 783, namely, the upright state and the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783. FIG.

In the state of FIG. 69, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H can be rolled.
When the MPU 52 detects that the second plate 783 is rotating in a substantially horizontal state, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the baffle plate driving section 702 to set the baffle plate 701 in a non-obstructing state. In addition, in FIG. 69, the baffle plate 701 is drawn in white to indicate a non-obstructing state.
Since the baffle plate 701 is set in a non-obstructing state, the game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H ( 45 arrow A), and as shown in FIG.
The game ball BA1 rolling on the plate surface of the second plate 783 toward the horizontal right collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 .

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 71, when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, thereby rotating the first plate of the first plate 782. The end surface of the shaped portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 inclined with respect to the plate surface faces the rotating member 78 side. have in
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 rolling on the upper stage 71 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state.
Also, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75 , and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 moves toward the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 . will be exposed inside the

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route to enter the guide path 75, and distributes about 60% of the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into the routes that fall into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route to enter the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are put into the game balls. It is configured to be sorted into routes that fall into the area.
Hereinafter, the flow of the game balls assigned to the route to drop in the game area of the upper stage 71 will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the game balls distributed to the routes entering the guide path 75 of the upper stage 71 and the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 are the same as in the reference form D described above.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that fall into the game area.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route to drop into the game area falls into the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 moves through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 to the permanent magnet of the third plate 784. 787, the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

When the MPU 52 detects the rotating state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate driving section 702 to repeat the baffle plate 701 between the non-obstructing state and the baffling state at a predetermined cycle. set. In FIG. 71, the baffle plate 701 is hatched to indicate the obstructing state, and in FIG. 72, the baffle plate 701 is outlined to indicate the non-obstructing state.

Here, the MPU 52 shortens the period during which the baffle plate 701 is set in the non-interfering state (for example, 0.3 sec), lengthens the period during which it is set in the interfering state (for example, 0.7 sec), and directs the stage distribution mechanism 73H to the game stage. The high-frequency obstruction mode, which obstructs the arrival of the ball, and the period during which the baffle plate 701 is set in the non-obstructing state are lengthened (eg, 0.7 sec), and the period during which the obstruction is set is shortened (eg, 0 .3 sec), and a low-frequency hindrance mode in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

When the MPU 52 detects that the rotation state of the second plate 783 has changed from the substantially horizontal state to the upright state of the second plate 783, the MPU 52 performs a lottery to select either the high-frequency disturbance mode or the low-frequency disturbance mode. Then, drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 is executed in the mode in which the lottery is won. Note that the MPU 52 executes a lottery to select the high frequency disturbance mode and the low frequency disturbance mode with a probability of 50% each, but may execute a lottery to select with a different probability.

When the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the obstructing state, the subsequent game ball BA2 is hindered by the baffle plate 701 and cannot reach the stage distribution mechanism 73H, as shown in FIG. In this case, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes leftward in the horizontal direction. It has become. However, since the baffle plate 701 is provided at a position vertically above the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 786, the game ball blocked by the baffle plate 701 does not reach the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. there is no conflict.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the non-obstructing state, the following game ball BA2 is moved to the stage distribution mechanism 73H without being hindered by the baffle plate 701, as shown in FIG. to reach However, when the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling contact surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached . Also, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the board surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates around the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped part 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 is no longer allocated to the upper stage 71.例文帳に追加Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes leftward in the horizontal direction. It has become. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is transferred to the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-like portion 786 . The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the length of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 when the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstructing state in the MPU 52 . Although the percentage of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 is set to about 20%, it may be set to a percentage different from this.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 (Fig. (See counterclockwise arrow in the middle). Further, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781. When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781, It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG.
After detecting the rotating state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, the MPU 52 immediately controls the baffle plate driving unit 702 to block the rotation when it detects the rotation about the rotating shaft 781 . Since the plate 701 is set in a non-obstructing state, the baffle plate 701 does not hinder rotation about the rotation shaft 781 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second game state is the first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the first probability. and a second probability state (low-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the first game state generating means to generate the first game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first probability state is generated by causing the first game state generating means to generate the first game state based on the first probability in the second game state. In the state, it is indirectly defined that the second game state generating means is caused to generate the second game state based on the first probability.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second probability state is the first game state generated by the first game state generating means based on a second probability higher than the first probability in the second game state. By generating, in the first game state, it indirectly defines that the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means based on the second probability.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the first game state is a first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability. and a second probability state (low-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate a second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability.
In the present embodiment, the first probability state and the second probability state indirectly indicate that the second game state generation means generates the second game state based on the first probability and the second probability. , but may be specified directly. In short, the first game state consists of a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability, and a second game state that has a higher probability than the first probability. It is only necessary to have a second probability state for causing the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the probability.

According to this, the first game state is the first probability state in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and the first probability state is higher than the first probability. Based on the second probability, the second game state generating means generates the second game state. The game is played in anticipation of a 2-probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained in addition to the same functions and effects as those of the above-described embodiment D.
(12) The first game state includes a first probability state in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and a second game state with a higher probability than the first probability. and the second probability state for causing the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the probability of The game is played in anticipation of the state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the second game state has a first probability state and a second probability state by setting the baffle plate 701 in the non-interfering state and in the interfering state for different periods. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the probability of causing the first game state generating means to generate the first game state can be made different. For example, as the second game state, the state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the obstructive state may be the first probability state, and the state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstructive state may be the second probability state.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the baffle plate 701 to the non-obstructing state and the obstructing state, but the first game state A configuration different from the baffle plate 701 may be adopted as long as the probability of generating the first game state in the generating means can be varied. For example, in the second game state, a motor is attached to the rotary shaft 781 instead of the baffle plate 701, and a large load is applied to the rotary shaft 781 to make it difficult to rotate. The second probability state may be the state in which the rotation is likely to occur.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 is a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
In the reference embodiment, the game board 2 includes a variable winning device 27, a cover 29 provided to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27, and a through gate 31 provided on the right side of the central portion. .
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. differs from the reference embodiment in that it includes a variable winning device 27I, a cover 29I, and a through gate 31I.
It should be noted that the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the lower right game means 8 avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The game board 2 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 2 includes a general winning port 24 provided at each opening, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 25, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 26, a variable winning device 27I, and out ports 28, 281. The game board 2 also includes through gates 31 and 31I provided on the left side and right side of the central portion, respectively, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided on the central portion, and the like. and Furthermore, the game board 2 has a large number of nails NL planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 27I is provided with detection sensors 301 to 304 (see FIG. 78) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 301 to 304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 . Specifically, the general winning port 24 includes a detection sensor 301, the upper operating port 25 includes a detecting sensor 302, the lower operating port 26 includes a detecting sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27I includes a detecting sensor 304. It has The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301 to 304 may be of any type as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 24 . The pachinko machine 1 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 25 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 26.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 27I. In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 25 and 26 may be different.

FIG. 74 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged. In FIG. 74, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are defined as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The lower right gaming means 8 includes the above-described variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I, and as shown in FIG. , a rotation distribution means 82 provided in the right area of the crew 81, an open start opening 83 provided on the lower right side of the rotation distribution means 82, and an area below the open start opening 83, An open winning device 84 provided adjacent to the right side of the variable winning device 27I, an out port 281 provided in the area on the right side of the open winning device 84, and a variable winning device provided in the area on the left side of the through gate 31I. A through gate 85 is provided.

The variable winning device 27I drives a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening and closing door 272 for opening and closing the big winning opening 271, and the opening and closing door 272. A variable winning driving unit 273 is provided. In other words, the variable winning device 27I has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27 in the reference form except for its position.
It should be noted that the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 27I avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the cover 29I is provided in the area below the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84, and has an opaque panel 292 formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 from the front through the window portion 122 .
In this embodiment, the cover 29I has only the opaque panel 292, but like the reference embodiment, the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 are transparent (or semi-transparent) so as to be visible from the front side. A transparent panel may be provided which is made transparent.

The big winning opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 271 is provided with the detection sensor 304 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 271 . The opening/closing door 272 advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to close the opening of the big winning opening 271, and retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 to open the game board. 2, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 271 is opened.
The variable winning driving unit 273 sets the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 272 .

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big winning opening 271 . In addition, in the open/close execution mode, after the open/close door 272 is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

Out port 281 is provided in the area on the right side of open winning device 84 . The game ball that has flowed down to the right side of the open winning device 84 is discharged from the game area through the out port 281. - 特許庁In addition, the flow path of the out port 281 merges with the flow path of the out port 28, and the game ball passing through the out port 281 is detected by a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of the game ball. It has become so. Note that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 281, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

The through gate 31I has the same configuration as the through gate 31 in the reference embodiment except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31I is provided with a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 78) for detecting the entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter the through gates 31 and 31I, unlike the case where balls enter various winning holes.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the entry of game balls into the out ports 28 and 281, the entry of game balls into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Also, entering the through gates 31, 31I and the variable winning through gate 85 means that the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. . A ball entering the through gates 31, 31I and the variable prize winning through gate 85 is also referred to as a prize in the same manner as entering the various prize winning openings.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged plan view of the croon as seen from the vertical upper side.
As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the clown 81 has a guide rail 811 that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the rotation distribution means 82 to the cloon 81, and a game ball that is guided to the cloon 81 via the guide rail 811. It has a disk-shaped swirl surface 812 for swirling a ball, and a side wall 813 provided along the periphery of the swivel surface 812 .
In addition, the guide rail 811 guides the game ball to the turning surface 812 along the side wall 813 .

The swivel surface 812 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof and has three holes 814 to 816 formed at equal intervals from each other. and a protrusion 817 having three side surfaces that slope downward toward the sides. Further, the turning surface 812 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 813 toward the holes 814 to 816 (see FIG. 74).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the croon 81 via the guide rail 811 turns on the turning surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enters one of the holes 814 to 816 (see FIG. 75). See arrow A).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, the croon 81 has a guide tube 818 that guides a game ball entering the hole 814 and causes the ball to enter the variable winning through gate 85 through the hole 801 formed in the game area. , and a guide tube 819 that guides a game ball that has entered the holes 815 and 816 to enter the through gate 31I through a hole 802 formed in the game area.

The rotation distribution means 82 includes a rotating body 821 formed in a generally V-shape, a rotating shaft 822 that rotatably supports the rotating body 821, and a rotating body driving section 823 that drives the rotating body 821. I have it. The game board 2 has a hole 803 formed in the area above the rotating body 821 .
Rotating body 821 is formed on the +Z-axis direction side, and has a guide surface 824 formed in a V shape by combining two inclined surfaces, a guide surface 825 formed on the +X-axis direction side, and a −X-axis direction. and a guide surface 826 formed on the direction side.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a croon guidance state in which the rotating body is rotated. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a start opening induction state in which the rotating body is rotated.
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, and 77, the rotating body 821 has three guidance states: a normal guidance state, a crew guidance state, and a start opening guidance state.
In the normal guiding state, as shown in FIG. 74, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the +Z-axis direction side and stop. The game ball flowing down toward the moving body 821 is guided to the hole 803 (see arrow B in the figure).

Here, since the guide surface 824 is inclined so as to descend toward the -Y-axis direction, the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 is guided to the hole 803 using this inclination. will be
Further, the rotation distribution means 82 is provided with a guide tube 827 that guides a game ball entering the hole 803 and causes the ball to enter the through gate 31I through the hole 802 formed in the game area.

76, the rotating body 821 rotates about the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 825 in the +Z-axis direction. The game ball that has flowed down is guided to the guide rail 811 of the croon 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the starting port guidance state, as shown in FIG. The game ball that has flowed down toward is guided to the opening start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

Rotating body driving section 823 drives rotating body 821 to set rotating body 821 to either the normal induced state or the specific induced state.
In the normal guidance state, the rotating body driving section 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the +Z-axis direction side and keep it stationary.
In the specific guidance state, the rotating body driving section 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 in the -Z-axis direction, and then rotates the rotating body 821. It rocks left and right so as to reciprocate between the crew guidance state (see FIG. 76) and the start opening guidance state (see FIG. 77).

The opening starting port 83 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. The opening start port 83 is provided with a detection sensor 307I (see FIG. 78) for detecting an entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 opens the opening winning device 84 based on the detection result. The pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the open start hole 83, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

The open prize winning device 84 drives an open prize winning port 841 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 842 for opening and closing the open prize winning port 841, and the open/close door 842. An open winning drive unit 843 is provided.
It should be noted that the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the open winning device 84 avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The open winning opening 841 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. The open prize winning port 841 is provided with a detection sensor 308I (see FIG. 78) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open winning hole 841 .

The opening/closing door 842 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape with a plate surface on the vertically upper side formed in a wavy shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the open winning opening 841 . The opening/closing door 842 advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2 to close the opening of the open winning port 841, and retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 to open the game board. 2, it has an open state in which the opening of the open winning port 841 is opened.

The opening/winning drive section 843 sets the opening/closing door 842 to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 842 .
Specifically, the opening/closing door 842 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when a game ball enters the open start opening 83, under certain conditions, the open/close door 842 is set to an open state in which the game ball can win.

Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 842 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball moves to the left over time while being swayed on this plate surface. The door 842 can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to an open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening starting port 83 .
Since the opening/closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 is provided adjacent to the right side of the opening/closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, it moves to the left over time while being swayed by the plate surface of the opening/closing door 842. After that, the game ball moved to the left side of the plate surface of the opening/closing door 272 .

The variable prize-winning thru gate 85 is provided with a detection sensor 309I (see FIG. 78) for detecting an entry of a game ball. When a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.
The variable prize-winning thru gate 85 serves as a trigger for starting a round game when a shift to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 wins the transition to the opening and closing execution mode in the internal lottery, and after shifting to the opening and closing execution mode, when a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the opening and closing door 272 is set to an open state, and execution of a predetermined number of round games is started.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine>
FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 78, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main control device 4, a sound emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 has a payout control device 46 and a power/fire control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/shooting control device 47 executes shooting control for causing the above-described game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot game balls.

The main controller 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main controller 4 has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41 and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42 . Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 4 .

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 431 , a distribution table storage area 432 , and a reach table storage area 433 .
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 43, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 44 has various areas such as various counter areas 441 , a pending ball storage area 442 , and an electrical pending area 443 .

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power failure monitor board 45 provided in the main controller 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 , the payout control device 46 and the sound emission control device 5 . In addition, the output ports of the MPU 42 are an electric accessory drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric accessory 261 of the lower operation port 26, a variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, and an open winning It is connected to the opening/winning drive section 843 that opens and closes the opening/closing door 842 of the device 84 , the main display section 34 and the character item display section 35 .

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 262 to open and close the electric accessory 261 . Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 273 to open and close the big winning opening 271 . In addition, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning driving section 843 to open and close the open winning opening 841 . Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 25 and 26 . Further, the MPU 42 executes display control of the character item display section 35 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the wins to the through gates 31 and 31I.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays the main control board 41 and the power supply/launch control device 47 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. . Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 45 .
The detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I are used for various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the open winning device 84, the out ports 28, 281, and each They are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the through gates 31 and 31I, the opening start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, the MPU 42 operates various prize winning ports, out ports 28, 281, through gates 31, 31I, open start port 83, and variable winning through gates. Winning judgment (entering ball judgment) to 85 is performed. In addition, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation opening 25 or the lower operation opening 26 .

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 4. do.

The power supply/emission control device 47 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, amusement arcades. Then, the power supply/launch control device 47 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 41 and the payout control device 46 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power supply/launch control device 47 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply section supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control unit 4 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 47 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feeder that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 23 toward the guide rail 23 . The power/shooting control device 47 supplies a drive signal (shooting permission signal) to this solenoid to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a distribution table storing values of random numbers relating to distribution destinations of types of jackpots.
In this embodiment, the first distribution table and the second distribution table are different from the reference embodiment.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the values of the random numbers related to the allocation destinations of the jackpot types are stored in the allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 78) of the ROM 43 provided as the allocation information group storage means. It is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 79(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 79(b). ing.
The MPU 42 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 .

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display portion reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 25 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 79(a), includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are distributed to “unspecified low ``15 to 19'' are assigned to ``Highly Probable Round Results'', and ``20 to 29'' are assigned to ``Most Favorable Results''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 26 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 79(b), has three distribution results of "low probability result", "best result", and "best result with special game" as distribution destinations. . Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 14” are the “best results” , and ``15 to 29'' are assigned to ``best result with special game''.
Here, the "best result with special game" is different from the "best result" in that a special game is added by the lower right game means 8. ' is treated the same as 'Best Result' except for this point. The special game by the lower right game means 8 will be explained later in detail.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 27I in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
"Non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", "best result", and "best result with special game" are opened and closed regardless of the lottery mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. This is the distribution result in which the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery.
Regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the support mode will change to the high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode. This is the sorting result that is set. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 27I in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described later in detail.

In this embodiment, the main controller 4 executes processing different from that in the reference embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of various processes in this embodiment, which are different from those in the reference embodiment, will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S107I, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 301-306 and 307I-309I. In this reading process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306 and 307I to 309I, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301 to 304 and 308I corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and The set command is transmitted to the payout control device 46 . For example, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 308I corresponding to the open prize winning device 84 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number, to the payout control device 46.
The payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 42 .

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 . do. The MPU 42 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 . The MPU 42 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31, 31I has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessary product updated in step S103 is opened. The value of the counter C4 is stored in the electric service reservation area 443. Further, the MPU 42 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 373 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 5 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 lights the third suspension lamp section 373 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the respective through gates 31 and 31I is, as described above, four at maximum, and the third reservation lamp section 373 is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the working opening.

In step S106I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for variable winning. In this variable winning process, the MPU 42 sets a variable winning flag in the RAM 44 when it is determined that the detection sensor 309I corresponding to the variable winning through gate 85 detects the winning of the game ball. . This variable winning flag is a flag for specifying that a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 85 .
Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the variable winning flag by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 and clears the variable winning flag by substituting 0 in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 .

In step S107I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for open winning.
Winning processing for open winning will be described in detail below.

<Winning processing for open winning>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for open winning.
In the winning process for open winning, the MPU 42 executes steps S4001 to S4004 as shown in FIG.
In step S4001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the game ball has won the open start port 83 by determining whether the detection sensor 307I corresponding to the open start port 83 has detected the winning of the game ball. .

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has not entered the opening starting port 83, it ends the winning process for opening winning without executing the processes after step S4002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has entered the open starting port 83, it determines in step S4002 whether or not the special game flag is set in the RAM 44. This special game flag is a flag for specifying that a special game is being executed by the lower right gaming means 8 .
Incidentally, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the special game is being performed by referring to the special game flag stored in the RAM 44 . The MPU 42 sets a special game flag when transitioning to a special game, and clears the special game flag when the special game ends. The transition to the special game and the end of the special game will be described later in detail.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game flag is not set, it ends the winning process for open winning without executing the processes after step S4003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game flag is set, in step S4003, the opening execution processing of the opening winning opening 841 is executed. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 sets the open/close door 842 to the open state by executing the drive control of the open winning driving section 843 .
In the present embodiment, the duration from when the opening/closing door 842 is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again is 0.17 sec. It may well be arranged to switch between a plurality of durations defined for different lengths of time.

In step S4004, the MPU 42 sets an open winning command. Also, the MPU 42 transmits the open winning command set in step S4004 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal processing. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for open winning.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the open/close door 842 has been set to the open state based on the open winning command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the reference embodiment in that it executes step S711I instead of step S711.

In step S711I, the MPU 42 sets a flag in the RAM 44 according to the sorting result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 42 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result" , set the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, and if it is specified as "explicit small-round high-probability result", set the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and set the "most favorable result" If it is specified, the most advantageous result flag is set, and if it is specified as "the most advantageous result with special game", the most advantageous result flag with special game is set. Then, MPU42 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes steps S815I and 816I after executing step S808, and executes step S817I before executing step S811.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S817I.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode in step S801 will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended. When the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", in step S805 the MPU 42 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. FIG. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 42 opens and closes the big winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27I when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "jackpot winning", in step S806, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result, in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to "2". Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not the high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, the distribution result is a "low-probability result", a "most favorable result", or a "most favorable result with a special game". If so, in step S808, the round counter RC is set to "15". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 42 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds regulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot winning", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 271 is opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or a predetermined number of game balls win the big winning hole 271 . Here, the total number of opening/closing times of the big winning opening 271 corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big winning hole 271 once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing the process of step S808, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S815I. Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S816I, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with a special game is set in the RAM 44 or not.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, it ends the game state transition processing.

After executing the process of step S805 or step S807, and when it is determined in step S816I that the special game with most advantageous result flag is not set, the MPU 42 stores various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. "1000" is set in the provided timer counter T as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, in step S816I it is determined that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set. Except for the case of determination, the wait time for opening is set in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S817I) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S817I, the MPU 42 executes special game execution processing.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in FIG.
At step S4101, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with a special game is set in the RAM 44 or not.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, it ends the special game execution processing without executing the processing after step S4102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, in step S4102 it determines whether or not the special game flag is set in the RAM 44. do.

When the MPU 42 determines that the special game flag is not set in step S4102, it executes the processing from step S4103.
On the other hand, MPU42 performs the process after step S4106, when it determines with the flag being set in a special game in step S4102.

First, in step S4102, the processing (processing after step S4103) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the special game flag is not set will be described.
At step S4103, the MPU 42 clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44. FIG.
In step S4104, the MPU 42 sets a rotation distribution start command. In addition, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation distribution start command set in step S4104 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific induction state based on the rotation distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S4105, the MPU 42 sets a special game flag in the RAM 44. FIG. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the special game execution process.

Next, in step S4102, the process (process after step S4106) when it determines with MPU42 setting the flag during a special game is demonstrated.
In step S4106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable winning flag is set in the RAM 44. In other words, after the MPU 42 executes the special game and clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S4103, a ball enters the variable winning thru gate 85 and the variable winning flag is stored in the RAM 44. It is determined whether or not the use flag has been set.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag has not been set, it ends the special game execution process without executing the processes after step S4107.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is set, in step S4107 it sets a rotation distribution stop command. In addition, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation distribution stop command set in step S4107 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal induction state based on the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4108, the MPU 42 clears the special game flag stored in the RAM 44. FIG.
In step S4109, the MPU 42 sets the best result flag in the RAM 44 instead of the best result flag with special game stored in the RAM 44. FIG.

In step S4110, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to "1000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

At step S4111, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S4111 to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S811 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special game execution process of step S817I, the MPU 42 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S811.
In step S812, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 the value of the timer counter T becomes " 0” or less.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 terminates the game state transition processing.

<Electrical configuration of sound emission control device>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 85, the sound emission control device 5 includes a sound emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the sound emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541 , various counter areas 542 , and sub-side pending information storage area 543 .

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, a rotating body driving unit 823 for rotating the rotating body 821 of the rotation allocating means 82, and the display control device 6. there is
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main controller 4 . Further, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotating body driving section 823 to rotate the rotating body 821 based on commands transmitted from the main controller 4 .
Also, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 6 . Note that the sound emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.
In this embodiment, the driving control of the rotating body driving section 823 is executed by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5, but it may be executed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4. may be executed by the MPU 62 of

In this embodiment, the audio light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processing different from that of the reference embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of various processes in this embodiment, which are different from those in the reference embodiment, will be described.

<Regarding production determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2401 to S2412, and before executing the process of step S2413, as shown in FIG. Execute the process.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2409 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has been received, in step S2402, based on the content of the type command, the game result is the "best result"("special game result"). (including the most favorable result) or the “low probability result”.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game") or the "low probability result", in step S2403, the game result type The symbol determination process corresponding to is executed. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most favorable result" (including the "most favorable result with special game"), the MPU 52 finally stops and displays on the activated line L. As a result, information related to a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number is determined, and when it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", finally on the activated line L Information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even-numbered number is determined as a stop result to be stopped and displayed. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most favorable result" (including the "most favorable result with special game") or the "low probability result", in step S2404, Based on the content of the type command, it is determined whether or not the game result is the "out of normal result".
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not the “normal result”, that is, the game result is the “special result”, the “non-explicit small round high probability result”, and the “explicit small round high probability result”. If it is either, in step S2405, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2406, the MPU 52 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal-out symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 52 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 52 provides information on a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406, the MPU 52 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . Specifically, the MPU 52 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2403, S2405 and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 retrieves from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52. read out. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . Thereby, the symbol display device 36 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2408, or when determining in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that it has received an opening command, it executes the processing from step S2410 onward, as in the reference embodiment.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2414I.

In step S2414I, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a rotation distribution start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that the rotation distribution start command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2416I.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that the rotation distribution start command has been received, in step S2415I, the MPU 52 executes determination processing for the rotation distribution start effect. In the rotation distribution start effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the contents of the rotation distribution start effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This rotation distribution start effect is an effect for informing the player that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific guidance state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific guidance state by executing the drive control of the rotating body driving section 823 and starting the rotation of the rotating body 821 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above. .

Further, the MPU 52 sets a rotation distribution start effect command related to the rotation distribution start effect determined in the rotation distribution start effect determination process of step S2415I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation distribution start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This rotation distribution start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotation distribution start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the rotation distribution start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the rotation distribution start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2415I, or when it is determined that the rotation distribution start command has not been received in step S2414I, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the rotation distribution stop command has been received in step S2416I. judge.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that the rotation distribution stop command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2418I.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that the rotation distribution stop command has been received, in step S2417I, the MPU 52 executes determination processing for the rotation distribution stop effect. In the rotation distribution stop effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the contents of the rotation distribution stop effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This rotation distribution stop effect is an effect for informing the player that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal guidance state by executing the drive control of the rotating body driving section 823 and stopping the rotation of the rotating body 821 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above. .

Further, the MPU 52 sets a rotation distribution stop effect command related to the rotation distribution stop effect determined in the rotation distribution stop effect determination process of step S2417I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation distribution stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This rotation distribution stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotation distribution stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the rotation distribution stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the rotation distribution stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2417I, or when it is determined that the rotation distribution stop command has not been received in step S2416I, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the open winning command has been received in step S2418I. do.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that the open winning command has not been received, it executes the processing after step S2413.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that the open winning command has been received, in step S2419I, the MPU 52 executes determination processing for open winning effects. In the open winning effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the content of the open winning effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This open winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the open/close door 842 of the open winning device 84 is set to the open state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets an open winning effect command related to the open winning effect determined in the open winning effect determination process of step S2419I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the opening prize effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This open winning effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the open winning effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the open winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the open winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2419I, or when it is determined that the open winning command has not been received in step S2418I, the MPU 52 executes the processing after step S2413.

In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 52 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42 . After that, the MPU 52 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the flow of special games>
FIG. 87 shows the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device before executing the special game. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device during execution of the special game.
The MPU 42 executes a special game when "big hit" is won in the win/fail lottery and sorted to "best result with special game" in the sorting lottery.
It should be noted that the MPU 42 can distribute "best result with special game" in the distribution lottery only when the jackpot type lottery is performed for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 26. It's becoming

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 62, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 52. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to inform the result of the lottery (Fig. 87 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 87(B).

Here, in the opening/closing execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guidance state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route flows down toward the rotating body 821, is guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821, or enters the open start opening 83 or the out opening 281. Or, it will flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route can enter the open starting port 83 or the out port 281, or can flow down toward the open winning device 84. However, by changing the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged on the vertically upper side of the opening starting port 83, the ball enters the opening starting port 83 and the out port 281, or toward the opening winning device 84. It may be designed so that it cannot flow down.

The game ball entering the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I through the guide tube 827, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
The variable winning device 27I and the game balls flowing down toward the open winning device 84 enter the big winning opening 271 when the big winning opening 271 is opened.
In addition, since the special game is not executed in the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing door 842 is not set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the open start opening 83.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side where the exit part of the guide rail 23 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the lower working opening 26 rather than the upper working opening 25 can be increased.
Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the rotation allocating means 82 is set to the normal guidance state. Therefore, the game ball shot toward the right-handed route flows down toward the rotating body 821 and is then guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821 (see arrow B in FIG. 74).

Then, the game ball entering the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I through the guide tube 827, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 31I is the state in which the electric worker is open. If the result corresponds to the transition, the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operation port 26
is opened in a predetermined manner.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operation port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. can be done.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

Next, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 starts variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Transition to high-speed fluctuation period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "best result with special game" in the allocation lottery, the MPU 62 receives the stop result command received from the MPU 52 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. Based on, as a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 87(D)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 executes a special game.
In the present embodiment, when the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result with special game", the MPU 62, as a stop result, determines a combination of symbols having the same number (in this embodiment, "7. 7, 7”) is stopped on the activated line L, but a combination of symbols (for example, “V・V・V”) that is different from the case of being sorted to the “best result” in the sorting lottery is valid. It may be stopped and displayed on the line L.

In the "best result with special game", the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific induction state based on the rotation distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. .
Specifically, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific induction state, and after announcing the result of the lottery, the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 5 moves to the MPU 52 as shown in FIG. Executes the rotation distribution start effect selected in .
Here, when the rotation distribution start effect is executed, the winning lottery mode remains set to the high probability mode, and the support mode clears the high frequency support mode flag by the processing of step S815I. Therefore, it is set to infrequent support mode. In other words, when executing the rotation distribution start production, it becomes "jackpot winning" in the success or failure lottery, and in the distribution lottery, it becomes "unspecified small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round)" It is in the same state as when it is distributed.

In the rotation distribution start effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest the player to hit to the right. In addition, the MPU 62 displays an angel character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and causes the player to enter the game ball into the croon with the character's words "Aim for the croon!" Suggest.

In the specific guidance state of the rotation allocating means 82, the rotating body driving section 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 in the -Z-axis direction. 821 is rotated to swing left and right so as to reciprocate between the crew guidance state (see FIG. 76) and the start opening guidance state (see FIG. 77).

76, the rotating body 821 rotates about the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the +Z-axis direction side. The game ball that has flowed down is guided to the guide rail 811 of the croon 81 (see arrow B in the figure).

The game ball guided to the croon 81 turns on the turning surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enters one of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in FIG. 75).
When the game ball enters the hole 814 of the croon 81, the game ball is guided by the guide pipe 818 to the hole 801 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 801 for variable winning. The ball will enter the through gate 85 .

When the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state based on the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42. , performs a predetermined process.
In the rotation distribution stop effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest the player to hit to the right. Further, the MPU 62 displays the character "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, as shown in FIG. 88(B). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the normal guiding state of the rotation allocating means 82, as shown in FIG. By making it stand still, the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 is guided to the hole 803 (see arrow B in the figure).

The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 88(C).

Here, in the opening/closing execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guidance state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route flows down toward the rotating body 821, is guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821, or enters the open start opening 83 or the out opening 281. Or, it will flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route can enter the open start port 83 or the out port 281, or can flow down toward the open winning device 84. However, by changing the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged on the vertically upper side of the opening starting port 83, the ball enters the opening starting port 83 and the out port 281, or toward the opening winning device 84. It may be designed so that it cannot flow down.

The game ball entering the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I through the guide tube 827, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
The variable winning device 27I and the game balls flowing down toward the open winning device 84 enter the big winning opening 271 when the big winning opening 271 is opened.
In addition, since the special game is not executed in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 842 is not set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the open start opening 83 .

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest the player to hit right (see FIG. 87(C)).

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the holes 815 and 816 of the croon 81, the game ball is guided by a guide tube 819 to a hole 802 formed in the game area, and then , and enters the through gate 31I.
In this case, the MPU 52 does not receive the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, so the rotation distribution means 82 maintains the specific guidance state.

In the starting opening guidance state, as shown in FIG. The game ball that has flowed down toward is guided to the opening start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).
The game ball guided to the open start port 83 enters the open start port 83 or the out port 281, or flows down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 77).
In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball guided to the opening starting port 83 enters the opening starting port 83 or the out port 281, or flows down toward the open winning device 84. However, the ball may enter only the open starting port 83.

During the execution of the special game, the opening/closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the open start opening 83 .
When the open/close door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the opening start port 83, the MPU 52 sets the open/close door 842 to the open state based on the open winning command transmitted from the MPU 42. It recognizes that the
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the open winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5, as shown in FIG. 88(D).

In the open winning effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to suggest the player to hit to the right. In addition, the MPU 62 displays a devil character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and informs the player that the opening/closing door 842 has been set to the open state by the character's line "Charging!!". Suggest.
During the execution of the special game, the MPU 62 executes an open winning effect each time a game ball enters the opening starting port 83 until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. will do. Then, when the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 62 displays the character "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 as described above (see FIG. 88). (B)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as specific ball entry means for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85 after the main control device 4 shifts the game state to the specific control state. It functions as specific control starting means.
After shifting the game state to the specific control state in the main control device 4, the lower right game means 8, before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process, performs the game in the specific control state. functions as special game execution means for executing different special games.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the main controller 4, before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process, the specific control Since the lower right game means 8 for executing a special game different from the game in the state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 function as special game payout means for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter.
In addition, in this embodiment, the crew 81 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. It functions as a sphere delay means.
The pachinko machine 1 has a special game path (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the lower right game means 8 is provided with the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter. The number of game balls can be increased when executing a special game.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Since it is provided, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main controller 4 to when the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

In this embodiment, the cloon 81 is used as the ball entry delay means, but the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and the game ball is guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it is possible to delay the time until the ball is hit. For example, in the present embodiment, the crew 81 has three holes 814 to 816, but guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and guides the game ball to the variable winning through gate 85. It may have only one hole as long as it delays the time it takes to hit the ball at 85. In addition, for example, by adopting other mechanisms such as rotating bodies, gate mechanisms, and gentle slopes, game balls flowing down the game area are guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and the game balls are guided to the variable winning through gate 85. The time until the ball enters the through gate 85 may be delayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are employed as the special game payout means. configuration may be adopted. For example, a special winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, and the like may be adopted.
In addition, in this embodiment, a right-handed route is adopted as a special game path leading to both the special game payout means and the entry delay means, but a left-handed route may be adopted, and the inside of the big winning opening Other routes such as a route or a route inside the character may be adopted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 play a game according to the length of the period for delaying the time until the game ball enters the variable winning thru gate 85 in the crun 81. gives benefits to people.
Therefore, the opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state in the main control device 4, during the period before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process It also functions as period profit giving means for giving profit to the player according to the length.

According to such a configuration, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 start the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4. A profit can be given to the player according to the length of the period before playing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are adopted as the period profit providing means, and after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4, the special game execution process specifies By increasing the number of openings of the opening prize winning device 84 according to the length of the period before starting the game in the controlled state, the number of game balls is increased and profits are given to the player. Anything that can award a profit may be awarded to a player. For example, useful information for the player may be provided, or a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be advantageously advanced may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening start port 83 functions as a special game ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and the opening prize winning device 84, when entering the game ball flowing down the game area, It functions as game ball payout means for putting out game balls. The open prize winning device 84 is set so as to be able to enter a game ball that flows down the game area when the game ball enters the open starting port 83 .

According to such a configuration, the open prize winning device 84 is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the open start opening 83, so that the player can enter the open start opening. Attention is paid to whether a game ball enters 83 or not. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open prize winning device 84 has a non-regulated state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and an open start state. There is also a regulating state for regulating the setting that the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered when the game ball enters the opening 83 . Specifically, the open winning device 84 is in a non-regulated state when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44, and is in a regulated state when the special game flag is not set in the RAM44.
In the winning processing for open winning, when a special game is being executed (when a special game flag is set in the RAM 44), the open winning device 84 is switched to the non-regulated state, and the special game is executed. If not (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), it functions as a regulated state switching means for switching the open prize winning device 84 to the regulated state.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open prize winning device 84 to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and restricts the open prize winning device 84 when the special game is not being executed. Since the prize winning process for switching to the state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the open start port 83 when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the open starting port 83.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the open prize winning device 84 has a non-regulated state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and an open start state. and a regulating state for regulating the setting of game balls flowing down the game area so as not to be able to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the opening 83, and the prize winning process for the open prize is performed by executing a special game. When there is, the open winning device 84 is switched to the non-regulated state, and when the special game is not executed, the open winning device 84 is switched to the restricted state.

On the other hand, the open prize winning device 84 sets the period from when the game ball enters the open start port 83 to when the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the first game ball. and a period from when the game ball enters the open start port 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter, which is longer than the predetermined period. and a waiting period for entering a ball. When configured in this manner, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball-entering waiting period when a special game is being executed, and opens when the special game is not being executed. It is only necessary to have a ball-entering standby period switching means for switching the winning device 84 to the second ball-entering standby period.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open prize winning device 84 to the first ball waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the open prize winning device 84 is switched to the first ball waiting period. Since the device 84 is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the open start opening 83 when the special game is being executed. , when the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the opening start port 83.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 reaches the left-handed route (first route) leading to the upper working port 25 and the lower working port 26, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, and the left-handed route. It has a right-handed route (second route) different from.
Then, the regulation state switching means and ball entry waiting period switching means described above switch the states of the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, thereby suppressing the shooting of the game ball toward the right-handed route. functioning as a tool.

According to such a configuration, the launch suppressing means suppresses the shooting of the game ball toward the right-handed route by switching the states of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, so that the player can The game ball is not shot toward the right-handed route aiming at the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the launch suppression means switches the open prize winning device 84 to the non-regulated state or the restricted state, or switches the open prize winning device 84 to the first ball waiting period or the second ball waiting period. By switching the states of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, the shooting of the game ball toward the right-handed route is suppressed. Any state of the opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 may be switched as long as the can be suppressed. For example, the launch suppressing means may suppress launching the game ball toward the right-handed route by switching the length of time during which the open winning device 84 is set to be able to enter.

In addition, in this embodiment, the croon 81 has a turning surface 812 for turning the game ball. The hole 814 functions as a guideable hole for guiding the game ball turning on the turning surface 812 to the variable winning through gate 85, and the holes 815 and 816 guide the game ball turning on the turning surface 812 to a variable winning. It functions as a guide-disabled hole that disables guidance to the through-gate 85 .

According to such a configuration, the croon 81 includes a hole 814 for guiding a game ball turning on the turning surface 812 to the variable winning through gate 85, and a game ball turning on the turning surface 812 through the variable winning through gate. 85 is provided with holes 815 and 816 that disable guidance, so after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main controller 4, before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process. It is possible to delay the time up to and simplify the configuration of the clone 81 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 functions as special distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the rotation distribution means 82 for distributing the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player can , the game ball is expected to be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 82, and the player plays the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 is employed as the special distribution means. , any configuration may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means (specific guidance state), and the right-handed There is also a distributable state (normal guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the route are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
In the special game execution process, when the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), the rotation distribution means 82 is switched to the specific induction state, and the special game is being executed. If not (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), it functions as distribution state switching means for switching the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal induction state.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific induction state when the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), When the game is not executed (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the special game execution processing is provided to switch the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal induction state, so that the player can play the special game. The game is played in anticipation that the rotation distribution means 82 will be switched to the specific guidance state in the execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board 2 in the specific induction state, and in the normal induction state By passing through the back surface of the game board 2, the game balls flowing down the right-handed route are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the rotation distribution means 82, in the specific induction state, distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board 2, and in the normal induction state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2, the pachinko machine 1 diversifies the flow of the game balls. be able to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotating distribution means 82, and then the variable winning through gate It can also be used as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 82 before the game balls enter the game ball 85. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not need to be the variable winning through gate 85 for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. Well, as long as the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, it may be of any kind. For example, the specific ball-entering means may be a special winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operation opening, or the like.
Further, the specific profit providing means does not have to be the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 that pay out the game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter, and if the profit can be given to the player, Information that is useful for the player may be provided, or a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be advantageously advanced, or any other information may be provided.

According to such a configuration, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotation distribution means 82, and then the variable winning through gate Since a profit is given to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 82 before the game balls enter the 85, the player can Benefits provided by the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board 2 in the specific induction state, and in the normal induction state. , the game balls flowing down the right-handed route are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means by passing through the back side of the game board 2 .
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary sorting means 82 that sorts the game balls flowing down the game area to either the first sorting channel or the second sorting channel. The rotating distribution means 82 distributes the game balls to the first distribution channel by passing them through the surface of the game board 2, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution channel by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2. ing.

According to such a configuration, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes the game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the surface of the game board 2, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2. Since the game balls are distributed to the paths, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game balls.

In this embodiment, the first sorting channel adopts a channel leading to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delaying means, and the second sorting channel is the special game payout means and the ball entering means. Although a flow path that does not distribute game balls is employed in any of the delay means, any flow path may be adopted as the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path. For example, the first sorting flow path and the second sorting flow path are the flow path leading to the special winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each working opening, or It may be a flow path or the like leading to a through gate. Also, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside the big winning slot or inside the accessory.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 provides the player with a primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. , and the flow path in the croon-inducing state functions as a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball-entering area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (rather than the primary benefit) of executing the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open prize winning port 841. function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guidance state allows a game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for
Furthermore, the lower working port 26 and the out port 28 execute payout of three prize balls when a ball enters the lower working port 26, and when a ball enters the out port 28 functions as a tertiary ball-entering area that provides the player with a tertiary benefit (a smaller benefit than the secondary benefit) that the player is not allowed to pay out prize balls, and is normally guided. functions as a tertiary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the tertiary ball entry area.
Then, the rotation distribution means 82 is in an operating state (specific induction state) in which the game ball can flow down to either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and to the tertiary flow path It has a non-operating state (normal induction state) that allows game balls to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game). .

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a flow path in a specific guidance state and a normal guidance state in which a game ball can flow down either one of the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting opening guidance state. It has a normal induction state in which the game ball can flow down, and has a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. Based on the start of the game, the game is played in anticipation of changing from the normal induction state to the specific induction state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the crew guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state are different in surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board 2. ing. Specifically, the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state form a flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guidance state forms a flow path on the back side of the game board 2. forming

According to such a configuration, the flow path in the crew guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 has three flow paths when a game ball is shot toward one route: a flow path in a crew guidance state, a flow path in a starting port guidance state, and a flow path in a normal guidance state. Even when a path must be formed, the limited space of the game board 2 can be effectively used to efficiently form the flow path.

In the present embodiment, the flow path in the crew guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state are formed by surfaces forming the three flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board 2. Although different, the number of channels need not be three, and may be two or more.
Further, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state form the flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guidance state forms the flow path on the back surface of the game board 2. Although the flow path is formed, the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board 2 may be reversed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the channel in the crew guidance state guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning thru gate 85, and the game ball enters the variable winning thru gate 85. A crew 81 is provided as ball entry delay means for delaying time.
In the pachinko machine 1, the game ball guided to the variable winning thru gate 85 by the crew 81 flows down the flow path in the starting port guidance state until the game ball enters the variable winning thru gate 85. When the game ball enters the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84, 15 prize balls are immediately paid out and the second benefit is given.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is in the starting hole guiding state until the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crew 81 enters the variable winning through gate 85. When another game ball flowing down the flow path enters the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84, 15 prize balls are immediately paid out and a second profit is given. Therefore, the player can instantly collect 15 balls even while waiting for the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crew 81 to enter the variable winning through gate 85. A secondary profit can be enjoyed by executing the payout of prize balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82, in the specific guidance state, allows the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the crew guidance state or the flow path in the starting opening guidance state. And, the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the flow path of the crew guidance state and the flow path of the start port guidance state is the same.
On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state may not be the same. The ratio of flowing down may be larger than the ratio of flowing down the game ball to the flow channel in the Krun guidance state.

According to such a configuration, the rotation distribution means 82, in the specific guidance state, allows the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path of the crew guidance state or the flow path of the starting port guidance state, and the starting port guidance state. Since the rate of game balls flowing down the flow channel is greater than the rate of game balls flowing down the flow channel in the crew guidance state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down the flow channel in the crew guidance state. will do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 shifts the game state to the specific control state by the main controller 4, and before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process, the game in the specific control state Since the lower right game means 8 for executing a different special game is provided, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) Since the lower right game means 8 is provided with an open start port 83 and an open prize winning device 84 for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter, the player can The number of game balls can be increased.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Since it is provided, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main controller 4 to when the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

(3) The open prize winning device 84 is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the open start hole 83, so that the player can enter the game ball into the open start hole 83. You will have to pay attention to whether or not you will enter the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(4) The pachinko machine 1 switches the open prize winning device 84 to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the open prize winning device 84 to the restricted state when the special game is not being executed. Since the winning process for the game is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the open start opening 83 when the special game is being executed, and shoots the game ball toward the open start opening when the special game is not being executed. A game ball is not shot aiming at 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The croon 81 has a hole 814 that allows a game ball turning on the turning surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and a game ball turning on the turning surface 812 to be unable to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Since the holes 815 and 816 are provided, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4, the time before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution process is delayed. , and the configuration of the clone 81 can be simplified.
(6) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotation distribution means 82 that distributes the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, the player can use the rotation distribution means At 82, the game is played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(7) When the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific guidance state and is executing the special game. If there is not (when the special game in-progress flag is not set in the RAM 44), the special game execution processing is provided to switch the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal guidance state, so that the player can rotate in the special game execution processing. The game is played in anticipation that the sorting means 82 will be switched to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(8) The rotation distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board 2 in the specific induction state, and distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means in the normal induction state. The pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls because it is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the entering ball delay means by passing through the back surface of the pachinko machine.

(9) The opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are the period after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4 and before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process. A profit can be awarded to the player according to the length of the Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(10) The opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 distribute the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable prize through gate 85 by the rotation distribution means 82, and then the game ball enters the variable prize through gate 85. Since a profit is given to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 82 before entering the ball, the player can use the open start port 83 and the open prize winning device 84. Benefits provided by the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game balls to the first distribution channel by passing them through the surface of the game board 2, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution channel by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2. Since the balls are distributed, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game balls.

(12) The pachinko machine 1 allows the game ball to flow down either the flow path in the crew guidance state or the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the game ball flows down to the flow path in the normal guidance state. It has a normal induced state that enables the normal induced state, and is provided with the rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induced state to the specific induced state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can start the special game. Therefore, the game is played in anticipation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(13) Since the flow path in the crew guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board 2, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 has three flow paths when a game ball is shot toward one route: a flow path in a crew guidance state, a flow path in a starting port guidance state, and a flow path in a normal guidance state. Even when a path must be formed, the limited space of the game board 2 can be effectively used to efficiently form the flow path.

(14) In the pachinko machine 1, the game ball guided to the variable winning thru gate 85 by the crew 81 flows down the flow path in the starting port guiding state until the game ball enters the variable winning thru gate 85. When another game ball enters the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84, the 15 prize balls are immediately paid out and the second profit is given, so that the game is played. The player immediately pays out 15 prize balls even while waiting for the game balls guided to the variable prize thru gate 85 by the crew 81 to enter the variable prize thru gate 85. You can enjoy the secondary benefit by letting it run. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In FIG. 89, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are defined as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 includes the variable winning device 27I, the cover 29I, and the through gate 31I, as well as the crew 81, the rotation distribution means 82, and the open start opening 83. , an open winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a through gate 85 for variable winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the lower right game means 8 is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided with a movement distribution means 86J instead of the rotation distribution means 82. different. The game board 2 of this embodiment also differs from the first embodiment in that it does not have the hole 803 .

The movement distributing means 86J drives a moving body 861 formed in a substantially triangular prism shape as a whole, a moving shaft 862 supporting the moving body 861 so as to be movable along the horizontal direction (X-axis direction), and driving the moving body 861. and a moving body drive unit 863 . The game board 2 has an elongated hole 804 through which the moving shaft 862 is inserted and which is formed so as to extend in the horizontal direction.
The moving body 861 has a guide surface 864 formed on the −X axis direction side and a guide surface 865 formed on the +X axis direction side.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a crew guidance state in which the moving body is moved. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a starting port guidance state in which the moving body is moved.
As shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the moving body 861 has three guidance states: a normal guidance state, a crew guidance state, and a start gate guidance state.
In the normal guiding state, as shown in FIG. 89, the movable body 861 moves the moving shaft 862 in the +X-axis direction to stop the guide surfaces 864 and 865 below the nail NL3J group and the nail NL3J group. The game ball flowing down through the group of nails NL4J is allowed to flow down as it is and is guided to the through gate 31I (see arrow B in the figure).

90, the moving body 861 is moved by moving the moving shaft 862 in the -X-axis direction to position the guide surface 864 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group. The game ball flowing down toward the body 861 is guided to the guide rail 811 of the croon 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
91, the moving body 861 moves the moving shaft 862 further in the -X-axis direction to position the guide surface 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group. , guides the game ball flowing down toward the moving body 861 to the open start opening 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

By driving the moving body 861, the moving body driving section 863 sets the moving body 861 to either the normal guidance state or the specific guidance state.
In the normal guidance state, the moving body driving section 863 moves the moving shaft 862 in the +X-axis direction to stop the guide surfaces 864 and 865 below the nail NL3J group.
In the specific guidance state, the moving body driving section 863 moves the moving shaft 862 in the -X-axis direction to position the guide surfaces 864 and 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, and then moves the moving body 861. It is moved to swing left and right so as to reciprocate between the crew guidance state (see FIG. 90) and the start opening guidance state (see FIG. 91).

In this embodiment, the main controller 4 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special game execution process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the special game execution process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104J instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107J instead of the process of step S4107, which is different from the first embodiment. .

In step S4104J, the MPU 42 sets a movement distribution start command. Moreover, MPU42 transmits the movement distribution start command set at step S4104J to the audio|voice light emission control apparatus 5 in step S301 of a normal process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement distribution means 86J has been set to the specific guidance state based on the movement distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S4107J, the MPU 42 sets a movement distribution stop command. Moreover, MPU42 transmits the movement distribution stop command set at step S4107J to the audio|voice light emission control apparatus 5 in step S301 of a normal process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement distribution means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state based on the movement distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of sound emission control device>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 93, the sound emission control device 5 includes a sound emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the sound emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541 , various counter areas 542 , and sub-side pending information storage area 543 .

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, the moving body driving unit 863 for moving the moving body 861 of the movement sorting means 86J, and the display control device 6. there is
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main controller 4 . In addition, the MPU 52 moves the moving body 861 by executing drive control of the moving body driving section 863 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4 .
Also, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 6 . Note that the sound emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.
In this embodiment, drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 is executed by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5, but may be executed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4, and the display control device 6 may be executed by the MPU 62 of

In this embodiment, the audio light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processes from those in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding production determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2414J to S2417J instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414J, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a movement distribution start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that the move distribution start command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2416J.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that the movement distribution start command has been received, in step S2415J, the MPU 52 executes determination processing for the movement distribution start effect. In the movement distribution start effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the contents of the movement distribution start effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This movement distribution start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the movement distribution means 86J has been set to the specific guidance state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the movement distribution start effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution start effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the movement distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state by starting the movement of the moving body 861 by executing the driving control of the moving body driving section 863 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above. .

Further, the MPU 52 sets a movement distribution start effect command related to the movement distribution start effect determined in the movement distribution start effect determination process of step S2415J. Then, the MPU 52 stores the movement distribution start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This movement distribution start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the movement distribution start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the movement distribution start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the movement distribution start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2415J, or when it is determined that the movement distribution start command has not been received in step S2414J, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the movement distribution stop command has been received in step S2416J. judge.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that the movement distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2418I.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that the movement distribution stop command has been received, in step S2417J, the MPU 52 executes determination processing for the movement distribution stop effect. In the movement distribution stop effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the contents of the movement distribution stop effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This movement distribution stop effect is an effect for informing the player that the movement distribution means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the movement distribution stop effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution stop effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the movement distribution means 86J to the normal guidance state by executing the drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 and stopping the movement of the moving body 861 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above. .

Further, the MPU 52 sets a movement distribution stop effect command related to the movement distribution stop effect determined in the movement distribution stop effect determination process of step S2417J. Then, the MPU 52 stores the movement distribution stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This movement distribution stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the movement distribution stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the movement distribution stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the movement distribution stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the processing of step S2417J, or when it is determined that the movement distribution stop command has not been received in step S2416J, the MPU 52 executes the processing after step S2418I, as in the first embodiment. do.

Thus, in this embodiment, the movement distribution means 86J functions as special distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the movement distribution means 86J that distributes the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. , the game ball is expected to be distributed to the special game payout means by the movement distribution means 86J. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the movement sorting means 86J is adopted as the special sorting means. , any configuration may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, the movement distribution means 86J distributes the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means (specific guidance state), and the right-handed There is also a distributable state (normal guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the route are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
In the special game execution process, when the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), the movement distribution means 86J is switched to the specific induction state, and the special game is being executed. If not (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), it functions as distribution state switching means for switching the movement distribution means 86J to the normal induction state.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the movement distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state when the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), When the game is not being executed (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the special game execution processing is provided to switch the movement distribution means 86J to the normal induction state, so that the player can play the special game. The game is played in anticipation that the movement sorting means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state in the execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize through gate 85 by the movement distribution means 86J, and then the variable prize through gate 85, before the game ball enters the game ball 85, based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the movement distribution means 86J, also as a specific profit giving means to give a profit to the player. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this manner, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. Well, as long as the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to enter, it may be of any kind. Further, the specific profit providing means does not have to be the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 that pay out game balls upon entry of the game balls flowing down the game area. Information useful to the player may be provided, or a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be advantageously advanced, or any other information may be provided.

According to such a configuration, the opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize through gate 85 by the movement distribution means 86J, and then the variable prize through gate Before the game ball enters the 85, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the movement distribution means 86J. Benefits provided by the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 provides the player with a primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. , and the flow path in the croon-inducing state functions as a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball-entering area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (rather than the primary benefit) of executing the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open prize winning port 841. function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guidance state allows a game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for
Furthermore, the lower working port 26 and the out port 28 execute payout of three prize balls when a ball enters the lower working port 26, and when a ball enters the out port 28 functions as a tertiary ball-entering area that provides the player with a tertiary benefit (a smaller benefit than the secondary benefit) that the player is not allowed to pay out prize balls, and is normally guided. functions as a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter the tertiary ball entry area.
Then, the movement sorting means 86J is in an operating state (specific guidance state) in which the game ball can flow down to either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and to the tertiary flow path It has a non-operating state (normal induction state) that allows game balls to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game). .

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a flow path in a specific guidance state and a normal guidance state in which a game ball can flow down either one of the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting opening guidance state. It has a normal guidance state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with a movement distribution means 86J that changes from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. Based on the start of the game, the game is played in anticipation of changing from the normal induction state to the specific induction state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movement distribution means 86J, in the specific guidance state, causes the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the crew guidance state or the flow path in the starting port guidance state. And, the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the flow path of the crew guidance state and the flow path of the start port guidance state is the same.
On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state may not be the same. The ratio of flowing down may be greater than the ratio of flowing down the game ball to the flow path in the Krun guidance state.

According to such a configuration, in the specific guidance state, the movement distribution means 86J causes the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the crew guidance state or the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the starting port guidance state Since the rate of game balls flowing down the flow channel is greater than the rate of game balls flowing down the flow channel in the crew guidance state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down the flow channel in the crew guidance state. will do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as (1) to (5), (9), and (14) in the first embodiment, the following effects and effects can be obtained. can play.
(15) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the movement distribution means 86J for distributing the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, the player can use the movement distribution means At 86J, the game is played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(16) When the special game is being executed (when the special game flag is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the movement distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state, and is executing the special game. Since the special game execution process is provided for switching the movement distribution means 86J to the normal guidance state when there is no special game execution process (when the special game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the player can move in the special game execution process. The game is played in anticipation that the sorting means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(17) The opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize through gate 85 by the movement distribution means 86J, and then the game balls pass through the variable prize through gate 85. Before entering the ball, the player is given a profit based on the game balls distributed to the open start port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 by the movement distribution means 86J. Benefits provided by the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(18) The pachinko machine 1 allows the game ball to flow down either the flow path in the crew guidance state or the flow path in the starting opening guidance state, and the game ball flows down to the flow path in the normal guidance state. Since it has a normal guidance state that enables normal guidance and is provided with movement distribution means 86J that shifts from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player can start the special game based on the start of the special game. Therefore, the game is played in anticipation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an enlarged front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In FIG. 95, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are defined as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 includes the variable winning device 27I, the cover 29I, and the through gate 31I, as well as the crew 81, the rotation distribution means 82, and the open start opening 83. , an open winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a through gate 85 for variable winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right game means 8 is different from the first embodiment in that it is equipped with rotation distribution means 87K in place of the rotation distribution means 82. different. This rotation allocating means 87K is a windmill attached to the game board 2. As shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 2 also differs from the first embodiment in that it does not have the hole 803 .

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the croon by the rotation distribution means. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the open starting port by the rotation distribution means.
As shown in FIG. 96, the rotation distribution means 87K rotates counterclockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow) by receiving the game balls flowing down toward the rotation distribution means 87K, and distributes the rotation. The game ball flowing down toward the means 87K is guided to the guide rail 811 of the crew 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
As shown in FIG. 97, the rotation distribution means 87K rotates clockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow) by receiving the game balls flowing down toward the rotation distribution means 87K. The game ball flowing down toward 87K is guided to the opening start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

In this embodiment, the main controller 4 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the special game execution process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the special game execution process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special game execution processing.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104K instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107K instead of the process of step S4107, which is different from the first embodiment. .

At step S4104K, the MPU 42 sets a special game start command. Also, the MPU 42 transmits the special game start command set in step S4104K to the sound emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the special game has started based on the special game start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

At step S4107K, the MPU 42 sets a special game stop command. Moreover, MPU42 transmits the special game stop command set at step S4107K to the sound emission control apparatus 5 in step S301 of a normal process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 5 recognizes that the special game has been stopped based on the special game stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of sound emission control device>
FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 99, the sound emission control device 5 includes a sound emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the sound emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541 , various counter areas 542 , and sub-side pending information storage area 543 .

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. Output ports of the MPU 52 are connected to various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 , the speaker unit 125 and the display control device 6 .
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main controller 4 .
Also, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 6 . Note that the sound emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

In this embodiment, the audio light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processes from those in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding production determination processing executed by the sound emission control device>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2414K to S2417K instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

At step S2414K, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a special game start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines that the special game start command has not been received in step S2414K, it executes the processing after step S2416K.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that the special game start command has been received, in step S2415K, the MPU 52 executes a special game start effect determination process. In the special game start effect determination processing, the MPU 52 selects the contents of the special game start effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This special game start effect is an effect for informing the player that the special game has started. In this embodiment, the special game start effect is the same effect as the spin distribution start effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets a special game start effect command related to the special game start effect determined in the special game start effect determination process of step S2415K. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special game start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special game start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the special game start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the process of step S2415K, or when it is determined that the special game start command is not received at step S2414K, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the special game stop command is received at step S2416K. do.

When the MPU 52 determines that the special game stop command has not been received in step S2416K, it executes the processing after step S2418I.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that the special game stop command has been received, in step S2417K, the special game stop effect determination process is executed. In the special game stop effect determination process, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game stop effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53 . This special game stop effect is an effect for informing the player that the special game has been stopped. In this embodiment, the special game stop effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution stop effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2004 based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets a special game stop effect command related to the special game stop effect determined in the special game stop effect determination process of step S2417K. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special game stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 . This special game stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2006.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52 . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the development buffer 68 . The VDP 65 also uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69 . As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the special game stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 .

After executing the process of step S2417K, or when it is determined that the special game stop command is not received in step S2416K, the MPU 52 executes the process after step S2418I in the same manner as in the first embodiment. .

Thus, in this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 87K functions as special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the rotation distribution means 87K for distributing the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player can , the game ball is expected to be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 87K. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 87K is employed as the special distribution means. , any configuration may be adopted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotation distribution means 87K, and then the variable winning through gate 85, before the game ball enters the game ball 85, based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 87K, it can also be used as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not need to be the variable winning through gate 85 for starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. Well, as long as the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, it may be of any kind. Further, the specific profit providing means does not have to be the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 that pay out the game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter, and if the profit can be given to the player, Information that is useful for the player may be provided, or a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be advantageously advanced, or any other information may be provided.

According to such a configuration, the opening starting port 83 and the opening winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotation distribution means 87K, and then the variable winning through gate Since a profit is given to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 87K before the game balls enter the 85, the player can Benefits provided by the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (5) and (9) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained. .
(19) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the rotation distribution means 87K that distributes the game balls flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, the player can use the rotation distribution means The game is played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means at 87K. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(20) The opening starting port 83 and the opening prize winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize through gate 85 by the rotation distribution means 87K, and then the game balls pass through the variable prize through gate 85. Since the game ball distributed to the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 by the rotation distribution means 87K before entering the ball is given to the player, a profit is given to the player. Benefits provided by the open winning device 84 can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 2 includes the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the through gate 31I.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that it includes an operating winning device 26L, a variable winning device 27L, and a through gate 31L. different. Also, in this embodiment, the game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that it has an equivalent winning opening 88L provided at the lower left position of the variable winning through gate 85. FIG.

FIG. 102 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged. In FIG. 102, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are defined as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The operation winning device 26L is provided adjacent to the left side of the variable winning device 27L. This operation winning device 26L includes an operation opening 261L that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening and closing door 262L for opening and closing the operation opening 261L, and an operation for driving the opening and closing door 262L. A prize driving unit 263L is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, it is possible to avoid the variable display unit 33 and the like and lead the game ball to the operation winning device 26L.

Here, the operation winning device 26L has the same configuration and the same function as the lower operation opening 26 in the first embodiment except for its shape and position.
Specifically, the operation opening 261L is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by performing router processing. This operating port 261L is provided with a detection sensor 303 and has the same function as the lower operating port 26 in the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 1 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the operation opening 261L. In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls of the upper operation opening 25 and the operation opening 261L may be different.

The opening/closing door 262L is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the operation port 261L. The opening/closing door 262L has the same function as the electric accessory 261 in the first embodiment.
Specifically, the opening/closing door 262L is connected to an operation prize driving section 263L mounted on the back side of the game board 2 . The open/close door 262L is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the operation winning drive section 263L. The closed state is a state in which the opening of the operating port 261L is closed by moving forward toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2 . The open state is a state in which the opening of the operating port 261L is opened by retreating toward the inside of the game board 2 and being buried in the game board 2 .

Therefore, when the opening/closing door 262L is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the operation opening 261L, and when the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the operation opening 261L.

In addition, the operation winning device 26L replaces the closed state and the open state described above with a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the operation opening 261L (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and an operation opening 261L may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. In addition, the operation winning device 26L may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the opening/closing door 262L but by displacing the operation opening 261L. , the opening/closing door 262L may not be provided.

Here, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the operation opening 261L by setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state. have. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state is relatively low, and a relatively low frequency of setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state. It has a high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared with the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the opening/closing door 262L to the open state more times when winning the electric worker open state, and sets the opening/closing door 262L to the open state. The opening hours are also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening/closing door 262L to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electric power opening state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 35) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to enter the operation opening 261L as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player left-handedly hits the firing handle 16 with a medium amount of rotational operation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed as the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side portion to the central portion, the probability of winning the upper working opening 25 can be increased rather than the working opening 261L. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16 set to the maximum, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 23 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the working opening 261L rather than the upper working opening 25 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that a prize has been entered into the operation port 261L, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can easily cause a game ball to enter the upper operating opening 25, and can make it difficult for a game ball to enter the operating opening 261L. route) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 261L and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening/closing door 262L to the open state with the low-frequency support mode. and relatively high.

The variable winning device 27L has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27I in the first embodiment except for its size. Specifically, the variable winning device 27L includes a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and an open/close door. A variable winning drive unit 273 for driving the door 272 is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 16, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 27L while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The through gate 31L has the same configuration as the through gate 31I in the first embodiment except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31L is provided with a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 103) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls when balls enter the through gates 31 and 31L, unlike when balls enter the various winning holes.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the entry of game balls into the out ports 28 and 281, the entry of game balls into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Also, entering the through gates 31, 31L and the variable winning through gate 85 means that the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. . A ball entering the through gates 31, 31L and the variable prize winning through gate 85 is also referred to as a prize in the same manner as entering the various prize winning openings.

The equivalent winning opening 88L is provided in the area on the left side of the variable winning device 27L. The equivalent winning opening 88L is equipped with a detection sensor 310L (see FIG. 103) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result of the detection sensor 310L. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out one prize ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning hole 88L. Note that the detection sensor 310L may be of any type as long as it can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

In addition, the game board 2 has a group of nails NL5L planted on the left side of the equivalent winning opening 88L. The nail NL5L group is planted so that all the game balls that have moved leftward on the plate surface of the opening/closing door 272 enter the equivalent prize winning opening 88L.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine>
FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 103, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a sound emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 has a payout control device 46 and a power/fire control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/shooting control device 47 executes shooting control for causing the above-described game ball shooting mechanism 49 to shoot game balls.

The main controller 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41 and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42 . Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc. are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 4 .

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main controller 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, and 310L. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 , the payout control device 46 and the sound emission control device 5 . Also, the output ports of the MPU 42 are an operation winning driving unit 263L for opening and closing the opening and closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L, a variable winning driving unit 273 for opening and closing the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27L, and an open winning device 84. It is connected to the opening prize driving section 843 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 842, the main display section 34, and the character item display section 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric power open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the operation winning driving section 263L to open and close the operation opening 261L. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 273 to open and close the big winning opening 271 . In addition, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning driving section 843 to open and close the open winning opening 841 . Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 to display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the operation ports 25 and 261L. Further, the MPU 42 executes display control of the character item display section 35 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the wins to the through gates 31 and 31L.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays the main control board 41 and the power supply/launch control device 47 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. . Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 45 .
The detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, and 310L are used for the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the operating port 261L, the variable winning device 27L, the open winning device 84, and the equivalent winning port 88L, as well as the out ports. 28, 281, each of the through gates 31, 31L, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85 are provided in one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, and 310L, the MPU 42 operates various winning ports, out ports 28 and 281, through gates 31 and 31L, an open start port 83, variable winning Winning determination (ball entry determination) to the through gate 85 is performed. In addition, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation opening 25 or the operation opening 261L.

In this embodiment, the main controller 4 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, normal processing differs from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the normal processing in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S306L is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306L, the MPU 42 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the opening/closing door 262L provided in the operation winning device 26L. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and also executes the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 262L is executed. Further, the MPU 42 performs display control of the accessory display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the opening amount of the opening/closing door of the operation winning device. Specifically, FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation winning device 26L viewed from the vertical upper side. FIG. 105(A) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a closed state, and FIG. 105(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a fully open state. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a half-open state.

The open/close door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. set. When the opening/closing door 262L is set to the closed state, the game ball passes over the opening/closing door 262L, and therefore cannot enter the operation opening 261L.

Here, in step S306L, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode by determining whether the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44 .

When the MPU 42 determines that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the MPU 42 sets the opening amount when setting the open/close door 262L to the open state to fully open. The open/close door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. set. When the opening/closing door 262L is set to the fully open state, the game ball can enter the operation opening 261L.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 42 sets the open/close door 262L to the open state. Set volume to half open. The open/close door 262L of the operation winning device 26L is driven by the operation winning drive unit 263L as shown in FIG. set. When the opening/closing door 262L is set to a half-open state, the game ball passes over the opening/closing door 262L, so that it cannot enter the operation opening 261L.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the variable winning thru gate 85 provides the player with the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters. Functioning as the next ball entry area, the flow path in the crew guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open prize winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (rather than the primary benefit) of executing the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open prize winning port 841. function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guidance state allows a game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for
Furthermore, the equivalent winning opening 88L has a tertiary profit (a profit smaller than the secondary profit) that one prize ball is paid out when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. to the player, and the flow path in the normal guided state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this tertiary ball entry area. are doing.
Then, the rotation distribution means 82 is in an operating state (specific induction state) in which the game ball can flow down to either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and to the tertiary flow path It has a non-operating state (normal induction state) that allows game balls to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game). .

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a flow path in a specific guidance state and a normal guidance state in which a game ball can flow down either one of the flow path in the crew guidance state and the flow path in the starting opening guidance state. It has a normal induction state in which the game ball can flow down, and has a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. Based on the start of the game, the game is played in anticipation of changing from the normal induction state to the specific induction state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L can provide one or less game balls when one game ball enters.

According to such a configuration, the equivalent winning opening 88L can provide one or less game balls when one game ball enters, so that the player can use the specific guidance of the rotation distribution means 82 In the state, the game ball is shot aiming at the rotation distribution means 82, and in the normal induction state of the rotation distribution means 82, the game ball is not shot aiming at the rotation distribution means 82. - 特許庁Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L pays out one winning ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. On the other hand, in the tertiary ball entry area, for example, a lottery is executed as to whether or not prize balls are to be paid out when a game ball enters, and one prize ball is awarded if the lottery is won. may be executed. In addition, the tertiary ball entry area includes, for example, a winning hole for executing the payout of one prize ball and an out hole for not executing the payout of the prize ball. may be provided with a switch for switching to enter the ball. In short, it suffices that the tertiary ball entry area is capable of imparting one or less game balls upon entry of one game ball.

Here, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in a predetermined game state (when it is determined that the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode). there is

According to such a configuration, the channel in the normal guiding state allows the game ball to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in the predetermined game state. When the dividing means 82 is in the normal guiding state, the game ball is not shot aiming at the channel in the normal guiding state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 prevents a player from gaining illegal profit even when a game ball is shot toward a right-handed route in a predetermined game state (normal game state). can be done.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (14) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(21) Since the equivalent winning opening 88L can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters the game ball, the player can, in the specific induction state of the rotation distribution means 82, rotate and swing. A game ball is shot aiming at the dividing means 82, and in the normal induction state of the rotation sorting means 82, the game balls are not shot aiming at the rotation sorting means 82.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(22) In a predetermined game state, the channel in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L. In the guidance state, the game ball is not shot aiming at the channel in the normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the right-handed route in a predetermined game state.

[Group of inventions extracted from each embodiment and each reference form]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments and reference forms will be described below. Among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments and reference forms are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-described embodiments and reference forms. Instead, modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose of the features of the invention group are included in the features of the invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
a first effect means (announcement suspension effect determination processing) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (prefetch effect) for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special A second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing a pending effect for digestion),
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means causes the first effect to continue to be executed after the second effect ends.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the second effect means, based on establishment of the second event different from the first event, causes the variable display means to overlap the first effect during a predetermined period of time. A second performance different from the first performance is executed, and the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance is finished. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to continue the first performance after the second performance is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect means A game machine characterized in that when the variable display means is caused to end the second effect, the variable display means is caused to resume the first effect.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variable display means to suspend the first effect and the second effect. When the means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, the variable display means resumes the first performance, so that the first performance is interrupted even when the first performance is being executed. The second effect can be executed by causing the second effect to be executed, and the first effect can be resumed after the second effect is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect means causes the second effect means to continuously execute the first effect during an overlap period in which the second effect is being executed by the variable display means. machine.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the first effect means continues the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first effect.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 25);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 26) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The production executing means is
By storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry portion as the first trigger, the change the first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect;
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second production is transferred to the second production layer (second production layer) having a higher priority than the first production layer. the second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing in the second layer L2);
an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature A4 of the group of inventions, the image composition means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority. , on the first effect layer storing the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part by the first effect means, the second effect is generated by the second effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second performance layer storing the data relating to the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Even in a state in which the first performance based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is executed, the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is overwritten. After the second effect is completed, the first effect means continues the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer. can be executed.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
an information storage means (suspension determination process) for storing suspension information in the information storage means in the order in which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means is
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reservation areas (first sub-side reservation area SRa and second sub-side reservation area SRb) for storing reservation information in a reservation state before execution of variable display by the variable display means,
The information storage means is
First reservation storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reservation information in the first reservation area (first sub-side reservation area SRa) based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball entry section; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section means (process of step S2203);
a pending shift means (pending shift process) for shifting the pending information stored in the first pending area and the second pending area toward the execution area;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area, so that the number of game balls entering the first start ball entering section Based on the ball entry, even in a state where the first effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is executed, based on the game ball entry to the second start ball entry part. , the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area can be executed.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 of the invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first reservation area digested before the reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area by the first reservation storage means. The game machine is characterized by being a look-ahead performance for informing a player of the degree of expectation of the pending information by using the performance based on the pending information.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section In the state where the first effect based on is being executed, the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part. If so, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the first effect is being executed for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. After the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first performance.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved design in a reserved design layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby displaying the reserved design to the variable display means. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the information notifying means displays the reserved design on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved design in the reserved design layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notifying means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. game machine.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the information notifying means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data relating to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved design on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to fade out the second effect.

According to feature A9 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means ends the second effect so that the variable display means fades out, so that the second effect is ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in feature A9 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. .

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. The second performance can be ended and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately, so that the second effect can be ended quickly.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, the following problems can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of the patterns.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
Based on the establishment of a specific opportunity, by storing data related to a specific effect (a look-ahead effect and an effect for digesting a special hold) in a specific effect layer (second layer L2 and third layer L3), Specific effect means (notice pending effect determination process and special pending effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the specified effect;
By storing data related to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the specific effect layer, the common image can be displayed on the variable display means. Information reporting means to be displayed (holding occurrence process);
A gaming machine comprising: an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the specific effect layer in order of priority.

According to feature B1 of the group of inventions, the information notification means stores data related to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer having a higher priority than the specific effect layer, thereby providing a variable display means. Since the common image is displayed on the variable display means, the common image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the common image displayed on the variable display means when executing a specific performance. .

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
Information storage means for storing hold information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means (hold determination process);
and said information reporting means for causing said variable display means to display, as said common image, a pending pattern associated with said pending information based on said pending information stored in said information storage means. .

According to feature B2 of the group of the present inventions, the information reporting means causes the variable display means to display the pending design by storing the data related to the pending design in the common layer having a higher priority than the specific rendering layer. To reliably display a reserved pattern on a variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means when executing a specific performance.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific production means is
Based on the establishment of the first trigger as the specific trigger, a first effect means (advance pending effect determination) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (prefetch effect) as the specific effect for a predetermined period processing) and
Based on establishment of a second trigger as the specific trigger that is different from the first trigger, during the predetermined period, the variable display means overlaps with the first production and is different from the first production. A second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing a second effect (special pending effect for digestion) as the specific effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means causes the first effect to continue to be executed after the second effect ends.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the second effect means, based on establishment of a second event different from the first event, displays the variable display means during a predetermined period of time so as to duplicate the first effect. A second performance different from the first performance is executed, and the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance is finished. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to continue the first performance after the second performance is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect means A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means is caused to end the second effect, the variable display means is caused to resume the first effect.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variable display means to suspend the first effect and the second effect. When the means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, the variable display means resumes the first performance, so that the first performance is interrupted even when the first performance is being executed. The second effect can be executed by causing the second effect to be executed, and the first effect can be resumed after the second effect is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect means causes the second effect means to continuously execute the first effect during an overlap period in which the second effect is being executed by the variable display means. machine.

According to feature B5 of the group of the present invention, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first effect.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B3 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 25);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 26) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The specific effect means is
With the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry portion as the first trigger, the data related to the first production is transferred to the first production layer (third layer L3) as the specific production layer. the first effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect by storing;
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second production is used as the specific production layer with a higher priority than the first production layer. a second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing in a second effect layer (second layer L2);
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature B6 of the group of inventions, the image synthesizing means superimposes a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority, thereby causing the variable display means to display the image. , on the first effect layer storing the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part by the first effect means, the second effect is generated by the second effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second performance layer storing the data relating to the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Even in a state in which the first performance based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is executed, the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is overwritten. After the second effect is completed, the first effect means continues the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer. can be executed.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
an information storage means (suspension determination process) for storing suspension information in the information storage means in the order in which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means is
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of reservation areas (first sub-side reservation area SRa and second sub-side reservation area SRb) for storing reservation information in a reservation state before execution of variable display by the variable display means,
The information storage means is
First reservation storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reservation information in the first reservation area (first sub-side reservation area SRa) based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball entry section; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section means (process of step S2203);
a pending shift means (pending shift process) for shifting the pending information stored in the first pending area and the second pending area toward the execution area;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area. Based on the ball entry, even in a state where the first effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is executed, based on the game ball entry to the second start ball entry part. , the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area can be executed.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in feature B7 of the invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first reservation area digested before the reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area by the first reservation storage means. The game machine is characterized by being a look-ahead performance for informing a player of the degree of expectation of the pending information by using the performance based on the pending information.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, so the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section In the state where the first effect based on is being executed, the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part. If so, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the first effect is being executed for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. After the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first performance.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B3 to feature B8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect by fading out.

According to the feature B9 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means ends the second effect by causing the variable display means to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in feature B9 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. .

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after causing the first effect means to cause the variable display means to execute the first effect. The second performance can be ended and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B3 to feature B8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately.

According to feature B11 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect all at once, so that the second effect can be ended quickly.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, the player can play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, in such a gaming machine, as well as storing hold information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls are entered into the activation opening, based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, A common image such as a reserved pattern is displayed on the variable display means. In addition, after starting the variable display of patterns, the gaming machine executes multiple types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the game machine, they may affect the common image displayed on the variable display means. There is a problem that it may not be possible to play games.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
a first effect means (announcement pending effect determination processing) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (prefetch effect) for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special A second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing a pending effect for digestion),
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to fade out the second effect.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the second effect means, based on the establishment of the second event different from the first event, causes the variable display means to overlap the first effect during a predetermined period of time. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Since the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect by fading out, the second effect can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. .

According to the feature C2 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. The second performance can be ended and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature C3.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
a first effect means (announcement pending effect determination processing) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (prefetch effect) for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special A second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing a pending effect for digestion),
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately.

According to the feature C3 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means provides the variable display means with the first effect overlapped with the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of the second event different from the first event. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Since the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect all at once, it is possible to quickly end the second effect.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means causes the first effect to continue to be executed after the second effect ends.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the first effect means continues the first effect after the second effect ends. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to continue the first performance after the second performance is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect means A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means is caused to end the second effect, the variable display means is caused to resume the first effect.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect and the second effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. When the means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, the variable display means resumes the first performance, so that the first performance is interrupted even when the first performance is being executed. The second effect can be executed by causing the second effect to be executed, and the first effect can be resumed after the second effect is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect means causes the second effect means to continuously execute the first effect during an overlap period in which the second effect is being executed by the variable display means. machine.

According to feature C6 of the group of the present invention, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first effect.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C4 to feature C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 25);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 26) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The production executing means is
By storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry portion as the first trigger, the change the first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect;
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second production is transferred to the second production layer (second production layer) having a higher priority than the first production layer. the second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing in the second layer L2);
an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature C7 of the group of inventions, the image composition means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority. , on the first effect layer storing the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part by the first effect means, the second effect is generated by the second effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second performance layer storing the data relating to the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Even in a state in which the first performance based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is executed, the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is overwritten. After the second effect is completed, the first effect means continues the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer. can be executed.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
an information storage means (suspension determination process) for storing suspension information in the information storage means in the order in which the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means is
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
a plurality of reservation areas (first sub-side reservation area SRa and second sub-side reservation area SRb) for storing reservation information in a reservation state before execution of variable display by the variable display means;
The information storage means is
First reservation storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reservation information in the first reservation area (first sub-side reservation area SRa) based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball entry section; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section means (processing of step S2203);
a pending shift means (pending shift process) for shifting the pending information stored in the first pending area and the second pending area toward the execution area;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area. Based on the ball entry, even in a state where the first effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is executed, based on the game ball entry to the second start ball entry part. , the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area can be executed.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 of the invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first reservation area digested before the reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area by the first reservation storage means. The game machine is characterized by being a look-ahead performance for informing a player of the degree of expectation of the pending information by using the performance based on the pending information.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, so the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section In the state where the first effect based on is being executed, the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part. If so, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the first effect is being executed for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. After the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first performance.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved design in a reserved design layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby displaying the reserved design to the variable display means. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the feature C10 of the group of inventions, the information reporting means displays the pending design on the variable display means by storing the data related to the pending design in the pending design layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notifying means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. game machine.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing the data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved design on the variable display means without using a new layer.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, the following problem can be solved because the player can play the game comfortably.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of the patterns.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
a first effect means (announcement pending effect determination processing) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (prefetch effect) for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special A second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing a pending effect for digestion),
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect is more useful for the player than the first effect.

According to the feature D1 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means provides the variable display means with the first effect overlapped with the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of the second event different from the first event. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Since the second effect is more useful for the player than the first effect, the player pays attention to whether or not the second effect is executed during the predetermined period. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means causes the first effect to continue to be executed after the second effect ends.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the first effect means continues the first effect after the second effect ends. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to continue the first performance after the second performance is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect means A game machine characterized in that when the variable display means is caused to end the second effect, the variable display means is caused to resume the first effect.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to suspend the first effect and the second effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. When the means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, the variable display means resumes the first performance, so that the first performance is interrupted even when the first performance is being executed. The second effect can be executed by causing the second effect to be executed, and the first effect can be resumed after the second effect is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect means causes the second effect means to continuously execute the first effect during an overlap period in which the second effect is being executed by the variable display means. machine.

According to feature D4 of the group of the present invention, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first effect.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 25);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 26) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The production executing means is
By storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion as the first trigger, the change the first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect;
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second production is transferred to the second production layer (second production layer) having a higher priority than the first production layer. the second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing in the second layer L2);
an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first rendering layer and the second rendering layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature D5 of the group of inventions, the image composition means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority. , on the first effect layer storing the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part by the first effect means, the second effect is generated by the second effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second performance layer storing the data relating to the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Even in a state in which the first performance based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is executed, the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is overwritten. After the second effect is completed, the first effect means continues the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer. can be executed.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
an information storage means (suspension determination process) for storing suspension information in the information storage means in the order in which the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means is
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
a plurality of reservation areas (first sub-side reservation area SRa and second sub-side reservation area SRb) for storing reservation information in a reservation state before execution of variable display by the variable display means;
The information storage means is
First reservation storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reservation information in the first reservation area (first sub-side reservation area SRa) based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball entry section; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section means (process of step S2203);
a pending shift means (pending shift process) for shifting the pending information stored in the first pending area and the second pending area toward the execution area;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area. Based on the ball entry, even in a state where the first effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is executed, based on the game ball entry to the second start ball entry part. , the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area can be executed.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first reservation area digested before the reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area by the first reservation storage means. The game machine is characterized by being a look-ahead performance for informing a player of the degree of expectation of the pending information by using the performance based on the pending information.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, so the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section In the state where the first effect based on is being executed, the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part. If so, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the first effect is being executed for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. After the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first performance.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved design in a reserved design layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby displaying the reserved design to the variable display means. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to feature D8 of the group of the present inventions, the information notification means displays the reserved design on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved design in the reserved design layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notifying means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. game machine.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the information reporting means causes the variable display means to display the pending design by storing data relating to the pending design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved design on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to fade out the second effect.

According to the feature D10 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means ends the second effect by causing the variable display means to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

Feature D11.
In the gaming machine described in feature D10 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. .

According to the feature D11 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. The second performance can be ended and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature D12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately.

According to feature D12 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately, so that the second effect can be ended quickly.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of the patterns.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 25 and lower operation opening 26) to be executed, and variation display means (symbol display device 36) for executing a variation display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. , a game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising effect execution means (audio light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute effects,
The production executing means is
a first effect means (announcement pending effect determination processing) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (forecast effect) having a plurality of expectations for a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity;
The game machine is
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second production overlapping with the first production and different from the first production during the predetermined period (for extinguishing the special hold) a second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing the effect),
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means changes the degree of expectation of the first effect during an overlapping period in which the second effect is executed by the second effect means.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect during a predetermined period based on establishment of a second event different from the first event. A different second performance is executed, and a first performance means changes the degree of expectation of the first performance during an overlapping period during which the second performance is executed by the second performance means. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to change the degree of expectation of the first performance during the overlapping period in which the second performance is executed by the second performance means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special The second effect means (special pending effect determination process) for executing the effect for digestion of the pending effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect means causes the first effect to continue to be executed after the second effect ends.

According to the feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect ends. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the second effect to be executed even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. It is possible to continue the first performance after the second performance is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect means A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means is caused to end the second effect, the variable display means is caused to resume the first effect.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect and the second effect when the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. When the means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, the variable display means resumes the first performance, so that the first performance is interrupted even when the first performance is being executed. The second effect can be executed by causing the second effect to be executed, and the first effect can be resumed after the second effect is finished. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect means causes the second effect means to continuously execute the first effect during an overlap period in which the second effect is being executed by the variable display means. machine.

According to feature E4 of the group of the present invention, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first effect.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E2 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 25);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 26) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The production executing means is
By storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion as the first trigger, the change the first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect;
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second production is transferred to the second production layer (second production layer) having a higher priority than the first production layer. the second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing in the second layer L2);
an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first rendering layer and the second rendering layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature E5 of the group of inventions, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority. , on the first effect layer storing the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part by the first effect means, the second effect is generated by the second effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second performance layer storing the data relating to the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. Even in a state in which the first performance based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is executed, the second performance based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part is overwritten. After the second effect is completed, the first effect means continues the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer. can be executed.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in feature E5 of the invention group,
The production executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of pieces of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means;
an information storage means (suspension determination process) for storing suspension information in the information storage means in the order in which the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means;
The information storage means is
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
a plurality of reservation areas (first sub-side reservation area SRa and second sub-side reservation area SRb) for storing reservation information in a reservation state before execution of variable display by the variable display means;
The information storage means is
First reservation storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reservation information in the first reservation area (first sub-side reservation area SRa) based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball entry section; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section means (processing of step S2203);
a pending shift means (pending shift process) for shifting the pending information stored in the first pending area and the second pending area toward the execution area;
The gaming machine, wherein the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area. Based on the ball entry, even in a state where the first effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is executed, based on the game ball entry to the second start ball entry part. , the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area can be executed.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 of the invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first reservation area digested before the reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the first reservation area by the first reservation storage means. The game machine is characterized by being a look-ahead performance for informing a player of the degree of expectation of the pending information by using the performance based on the pending information.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, so the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section In the state where the first effect based on is being executed, the second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry part. If so, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the first effect is being executed for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first opportunity. After the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first performance.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved design in a reserved design layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby displaying the reserved design to the variable display means. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to feature E8 of the group of the present inventions, the information notification means displays the reserved design on the variable display means by storing data related to the reserved design in the reserved design layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group,
The production executing means is
Based on the hold information stored in the information storage means, an information notification means (hold generation process) for displaying the hold pattern associated with the hold information on the variable display means,
The information notifying means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data related to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. game machine.

According to feature E9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved design by storing data relating to the reserved design in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved design on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E2 to feature E9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect by fading out.

According to the feature E10 of the group of the present invention, the second effect means ends the second effect by causing the variable display means to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

Feature E11.
In the gaming machine described in feature E10 of the invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. .

According to feature E11 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to end the second effect after the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect. The second performance can be ended and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature E12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E2 to feature E9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately.

According to feature E12 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to collectively end the second effect immediately, so that the second effect can be ended quickly.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of the patterns.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to comfortably play the game.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1.
It has a shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a rolling surface for rolling the game balls flowing down the game area. A stage (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) in which the game ball is temporarily rolled and dropped at the stage, and a ball entry means (upper operation port 25) that can enter the game ball dropped from the stage A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising
The stage is
Guide means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding game balls to the rolling surfaces (rolling surfaces 74) of the stages (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
When at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means, blocking means ( A game machine characterized by comprising a second plate 783).

According to feature F1 of the group of inventions, when the guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage, the blocking means causes the following game ball to be guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the stage without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
The stage is
a first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
A second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage,
The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the first stage,
By guiding the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 76) of the second stage, the blocking means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage by the guiding means. A gaming machine characterized in that it prevents the player from playing the game.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the second stage, Since the guidance means prevents the subsequent game balls from being guided to the rolling surface of the first stage, the player guides the subsequent game balls to the rolling surface of the first stage by the blocking means. Even if this is blocked, the user can enjoy the subsequent movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the second stage.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first stage is more advantageous for the player than the second stage.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the guiding means rolls on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is more advantageous for the player than the second stage, the player can feel at ease the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage. can enjoy.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The blocking means is
a blocking state in which the guidance means prevents subsequent game balls from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
a non-blocking state in which the guidance means does not block the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
The stage is
switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state;
A gaming machine, wherein the switching means switches the blocking means to a blocking state when at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F4 of the group of inventions, the stage comprises switching means for switching the blocking means between the blocking state and the non-blocking state, and the switching means causes at least one game ball to move on the stage by the guiding means. Since the blocking means is switched to the blocking state when guided to the moving surface, the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F5.
In the game machine described in feature F4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to the feature F5 of the group of the present invention, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means. The movement of the game ball guided to the stage can be further enjoyed.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means. can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means,
The gaming machine, wherein the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guide means.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the switching means comprises contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, Since the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guide means, the player can reach the stage by the guide means. Attention is paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to touches the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F8.
In the game machine described in feature F6 of the invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means,
A gaming machine, wherein the contact means is disposed at a position where all of the following game balls, which are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guide means, come into contact with each other.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the switching means includes contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, Since the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all the game balls that follow the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guide means, the player can easily touch the rolling surface of the stage. You can enjoy the guided movement of the game ball without worry.

According to the characteristic group F of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine has a stage for temporarily rolling and dropping the game ball flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball that has fallen from this stage to enter.

However, if a game ball rolling on the stage comes into contact with a subsequent game ball, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably for the player. There is a problem that the player cannot play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1.
It has a shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a rolling surface for rolling the game balls flowing down the game area. A stage (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) in which the game ball is temporarily rolled and dropped at the stage, and a ball entry means (upper operation port 25) that can enter the game ball dropped from the stage A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising
The stage is
a first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage;
It has a first guidance state that guides the game ball only to the first stage and a second guidance state that guides the game ball only to the second stage, and the first stage and the second stage. Stage guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to one of the stages of
The stage guidance means is
A gaming machine comprising switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the stage guidance means between a first guidance state and a second guidance state.

According to feature G1 of the group of inventions, the stage guiding means comprises switching means for switching the stage guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state, and the switching means switches only to the first stage. Since switching is made between the first guidance state for guiding the game ball and the second guidance state for guiding the game ball only to the second stage, the player pays attention to the state of the stage guidance means. . Further, the switching means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means by switching to the second guiding state (first guiding state). Therefore, the game ball guided to the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means can reach the first stage (second stage) without being hindered by the subsequent game balls. can roll on the rolling surface of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the first stage by the stage guiding means. game machine.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, the switching means changes the stage guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the first stage by the stage guiding means. Because of the switching, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by the following game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first stage is more advantageous for the player than the second stage.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means rolls on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is an advantageous stage for the player compared to the second stage, the player can safely control the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage. You can enjoy it to your heart's content.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guidance state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, so that the game The player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 of the invention group,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Amusement machine.

According to feature G5 of the group of inventions, the switching means causes the stage guiding means to move to the first stage by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Since the state is switched, the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the invention group,
The switching means is
By contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means, the contact means (the second plate-shaped portion 786) switches the stage guidance means to the first guidance state. ),
The contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts some of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guide means. game machine.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guidance means into the first guidance state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means. The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) that switches the stage guidance means to the first guidance state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means. prepared,
The gaming machine, wherein the contact means is disposed at a position where all of the following game balls, which are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the guiding means, come into contact with each other. .

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guidance means into the first guidance state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means. , and the contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. , the player can safely enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine has a stage for temporarily rolling and dropping the game ball flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means enables the game ball that has fallen from this stage to enter.

However, if a game ball rolling on the stage comes into contact with a subsequent game ball, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably for the player. There is a problem that the player cannot play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a channel (two-stage stages 7, 7E) for inflowing the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising
The flow path is
a first flow path (upper stage 71, 71E);
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
It has a first guidance state in which a game ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which a game ball is guided only to the second flow path, wherein the first flow path and A flow path guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) that guides the game ball to one of the second flow paths,
The flow path guiding means is
Switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means between a first guiding state and a second guiding state,
The game machine, wherein the switching means switches to the first guidance state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, the switching means has a first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the second flow path. , the player pays attention to the state of the flow path guide means. Further, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the first flow path. The game ball guided to the flow path can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Furthermore, the switching means switches to the first guidance state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can use the flow path guiding means to switch to the first guidance state. The motion of the game ball guided to one flow path can be further enjoyed. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the invention group,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guidance state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. game machine.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature H3.
In the game machine described in feature H2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path.

According to feature H3 of the group of inventions, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path, the player can safely enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first flow path. be able to.

According to the characteristic group H of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine includes a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the game ball flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball that has fallen from this stage to enter. .

However, if a game ball rolling in a channel such as a stage comes into contact with a subsequent game ball, the game ball rolling in the stage may move disadvantageously for the player. A gaming machine has a problem that it becomes impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a channel (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G), a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising
The flow path is
a first flow path (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
It has a first guidance state in which a game ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which a game ball is guided only to the second flow path, wherein the first flow path and A flow path guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) that guides the game ball to one of the second flow paths,
The flow path guidance means is
Switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means between a first guiding state and a second guiding state,
A game characterized in that the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. machine.

According to feature I1 of the group of inventions, the switching means has a first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the second flow path. , the player pays attention to the state of the flow path guide means. Further, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding the subsequent game ball to the first flow path. The game ball guided to the flow path can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Furthermore, the switching means switches to the first guided state by cooperating with the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can It is possible to further enjoy the movement of subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the invention group,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guidance state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. game machine.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guidance state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in feature I2 of the invention group,
The switching means is
Contact means (second plate shaped portion 786),
The contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts some of the following game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. Amusement machine.

According to feature I3 of the present invention group, the switching means changes the flow path guiding means to the first flow path by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is in a position to contact some of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guidance means. Since it is arranged, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in feature I2 of the invention group,
The switching means is
Contact means (fourth plate 789G),
The contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts all of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. game machine.

According to feature I4 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the first flow path by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is arranged at a position where it contacts all of the following game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guidance means. Since the first flow path is provided, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first flow path without anxiety.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path.

According to feature I5 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by the following game balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path, the player can safely enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first flow path. be able to.

According to the characteristic group I of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine includes a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the game ball flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball that has fallen from this stage to enter. .

However, if a game ball rolling in a channel such as a stage comes into contact with a subsequent game ball, the game ball rolling in the stage may move disadvantageously for the player. A gaming machine has a problem that it becomes impossible for a player to play a game comfortably.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area are allowed to enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction part 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is set. and the game state of
Guiding means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation port 25) that gives profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the generation of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area. state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the shooting means after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition, the first game state is activated. First game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786 or fourth plate 789G) to generate,
generating the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state; A game machine characterized by comprising a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second game state, only a game ball existing in a specific area in the game area is allowed to enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means Since the game ball entering the first ball entering area is guided to the second ball entering area, the player can enjoy the profit when the second game state occurs. Further, the limiting means causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is being generated. Therefore, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the restricting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state.

According to feature J2 of the present invention group, the limiting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the second game state generating means , the occurrence of the second game state can be reliably restricted.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 or feature J2 of the invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the passage of the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the occurrence of the first game state through a predetermined area in the game area. A game machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to feature J3 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since no game state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means are
a restriction state for restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means;
and an unrestricted state in which the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means is not restricted,
When the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, it is switched to the restricted state, and when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means, the non- A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature J4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the limiting state when the second game state generating means generates the second game state, and the first game state generating means generates the first game state. Since the state is switched to the unrestricted state when the state is generated, the second game can be played without restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the second game state generation means while the state is being generated.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature J5 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability;
and a second probability state (low frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature J6 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability, and a first probability and a second probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the probability state of the second game state generating means. , and the game is played in anticipation of the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball.

According to feature J7 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball, so that the second game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to feature J8 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so that the first game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to the characteristic group J of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, thereby allowing the player to play the game. has increased the attention to

However, if the game state is switched to the first game state without receiving any profit while the second game state is being generated, the gaming machine cannot allow the player to comfortably play the game. .

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area are allowed to enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction part 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is set. and the game state of
Guiding means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation port 25) that gives profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the generation of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area. state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the shooting means after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition, the first game state is activated. First game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786 or fourth plate 789G) to generate,
A game characterized by comprising a game ball guiding means (second plate 783) for guiding the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. machine.

According to the feature K1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second game state, only game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means Since the game ball entering the first ball entering area is guided to the second ball entering area, the player can enjoy the profit when the second game state occurs. In addition, since the game ball guiding means guides the game ball shot by the shooting means during the occurrence of the second game state to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area, the player can easily perform the second game. You can relax and enjoy the situation.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 of the invention group,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the passage of the second game ball through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by generating states.

According to the characteristic K2 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the second game ball game area during the generation of the second game state, Since the first game state is generated, the second game ball can be used to generate the first game state.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 or feature K2 of the invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the passage of the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the occurrence of the first game state through a predetermined area in the game area. A game machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to the feature K3 of the present invention group, the second game state generation means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since no game state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature K4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3 of the invention group,
The game ball guiding means is
a game ball guidance state for guiding the second game ball to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state;
a game ball non-guiding state in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring;
When the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, the state is switched to the game ball guidance state, and when the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means. A game machine characterized by switching to the game ball non-induction state.

According to the feature K4 of the present invention group, the game ball guiding means switches to the game ball guiding state when the second game state generating means generates the second game state, and the first game state generating means To restrict generation of a second game state by a second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state, because the state is switched to the game ball non-induction state when the first game state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the second game state generation means while the second game state is being generated.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature K5 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5 of the invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability;
and a second probability state (low frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature K6 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability, and a first probability and a second probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the probability state of the second game state generating means. , and the game is played in anticipation of the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball.

According to the feature K7 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so that the second game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to the feature K8 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball, so the first game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to the characteristic group K of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, thereby allowing the player to play the game. has increased the attention to

However, if the game state is switched to the first game state without receiving any profit while the second game state is being generated, the gaming machine cannot allow the player to comfortably play the game. .

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area are allowed to enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction part 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is set. and the game state of
Guiding means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operation port 25) that gives profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the generation of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area. state generating means (first plate 782 and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the shooting means after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition, the first game state is activated. A first game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786) to generate,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature L1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second game state, only a game ball existing in a specific area in the game area is allowed to enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means Since the game ball entering the first ball entering area is guided to the second ball entering area, the player can enjoy the profit when the second game state occurs. Further, the first game state includes a first probability state in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and a second game state having a higher probability than the first probability. Based on the probability, the second game state generating means has the second probability state to generate the second game state. You will play with the expectation that it will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in feature L1 of the invention group,
generating the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state; A gaming machine characterized by comprising limiting means for limiting the.

According to the feature L2 of the group of the present invention, the limiting means, in the second game state generating means, based on the fact that the second game ball passes through the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state Since the occurrence of the second game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in feature L2 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the restricting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state.

According to the feature L3 of the group of the present invention, the limiting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so the second game state generating means , the occurrence of the second game state can be reliably restricted.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in feature L2 or feature L3 of the invention group,
The limiting means are
a restriction state for restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means;
and an unrestricted state in which the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means is not restricted,
When the second game state generating means generates the second game state, it switches to the restricted state, and when the first game state generating means generates the first game state, the non- A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature L4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the limiting state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generating means, and the first game state is generated by the first game state generating means. Since the state is switched to the unrestricted state when the state is generated, the second game can be played without restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the second game state generation means while the state is being generated.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4 of the present invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the passage of the first game ball shot by the shooting means during the occurrence of the first game state through a predetermined area in the game area. A game machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to feature L5 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since no game state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature L6 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means establishes a specific condition based on only some of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball.

According to feature L7 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball, so that the second game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L7 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to feature L8 of the present invention group, the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball, so the first game state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to the characteristic group L of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, thereby allowing the player to play the game. has increased the attention to

However, if the game state is switched to the first game state without receiving any profit while the second game state is being generated, the gaming machine cannot allow the player to comfortably play the game. .

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board,
a first gaming state;
a second game state different from the first game state;
The first game ball shot by the shooting means during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area, contacts the first game ball, and is displaced. , second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783) for generating the second game state;
A second game ball shot by the shooting means after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area and hits the second game ball. first game state generating means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for generating the first game state based on contact and displacement;
generating the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the passage of the second game ball through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state; and a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the
The second game state generating means is a first profit giving area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) for giving a first profit to the player with the first game ball that has caused the second game state. ), and the first game state generating means provides the player with the second game ball that generated the first game state with a second profit different from the first profit. A gaming machine characterized in that it guides the player to the profit giving area (lower stage 72).

According to the feature M1 of the group of inventions, the second game state generating means places the first game ball that generated the second game state in the first profit giving area for giving the first profit to the player. The first game state generating means guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the second profit giving area for giving the player a second profit different from the first profit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the guide destination of the game ball. Further, the limiting means causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is being generated. Therefore, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature M2.
In the gaming machine described in feature M1 of the invention group,
The first game ball guided to the first profit giving area by the second game state generating means is a first profit receiving means for giving the first profit when a first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball area (upper introduction part 751) and is guided to the second profit giving area by the first game state generating means is a second game ball different from the first condition. A gaming machine characterized in that, when condition 2 is satisfied, a ball is entered into a second profit ball entry area (lower stage introduction part 771) that provides the second profit.

According to the feature M2 of the group of the present invention, the first game ball guided to the first profit giving area by the second game state generating means receives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the first profit entry area to be awarded and guided to the second profit provision area by the first game state generating means is subjected to a second condition different from the first condition. If the conditions are met, the ball enters the second profit-entering area that gives the second profit, so the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are met.

Feature M3.
In the gaming machine described in feature M2 of the invention group,
The first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are the first profit ball entry area and the second profit ball entry area. A gaming machine characterized by being discharged to another area different from both areas.

According to feature M3 of the present invention group, the first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not satisfy the second condition are located in the first profit ball entry area and the second profit ball entry area. Since the balls are discharged to other areas different from both areas of the entering ball area, the player pays attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to other areas. .

Feature M4.
In the game machine described in features M1 to M3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means are
a restriction state for restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means;
and an unrestricted state in which the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means is not restricted,
When the second game state generating means generates the second game state, it switches to the restricted state, and when the first game state generating means generates the first game state, the non- A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature M4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the limiting state when the second game state generating means generates the second game state, and the first game state generating means generates the first game state. Since the state is switched to the unrestricted state when the state is generated, the second game can be played without restricting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the second game state generation means while the state is being generated.

Feature M5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M4 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency disturbance mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature M5 of the present invention group, the first game state includes a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability, and a first probability and a second probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability higher than the probability state of the second game state generating means. , and the game is played in anticipation of the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group M of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which provides the player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, thereby allowing the player to play the game. has increased the attention to

However, if the game state is switched to the first game state without receiving any profit while the second game state is being generated, the gaming machine cannot allow the player to comfortably play the game. .

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25 and operation port 261L), and game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising (main controller 4),
The game board is
a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that provides the player with a primary profit;
A secondary profit that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an open starting port 83 and an open prize winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary profit smaller than the primary profit. and a flow path of
a tertiary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area (equivalent prize winning opening 88L) that provides the player with a tertiary profit that is smaller than the secondary profit;
An operating state in which game balls can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the tertiary flow path. and an operating member (rotation distribution means 82) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition,
A gaming machine, wherein the tertiary flow path allows a game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entering area in a predetermined game state.

According to feature N1 of the present invention group, the game machine has an operating state in which the game ball can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path. It has a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can enjoy the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Based on this, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state, the player can not operate the operating member in a predetermined game state. In this state, game balls will not be shot aiming at the tertiary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature N2.
In the gaming machine described in feature N1 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. machine.

According to feature N2 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces forming the flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the gaming machine has three flow paths, a primary flow path, a secondary flow path, and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if it must be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature N3.
In the gaming machine described in feature N1 or feature N2 of the invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delaying means (crun 81 ),
The game machine is
While the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the first ball entry area, it flows down the second flow path. a game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the game machine immediately performs the provision processing of providing the secondary profit.

According to the feature N3 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine, until the game ball guided to the first ball-entering area by the ball-entering delay means enters the first ball-entering area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary ball entering area, the second profit is immediately given, so that the player can enter the game ball. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first ball entry area, the player immediately enjoys the secondary profit. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature N4.
In the gaming machine described in feature N3 of the invention group,
the primary ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
the secondary ball-entering area as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player;
the operating member as a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means;
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means, before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, performs the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to feature N4 of the group of the present invention, the specific profit provision means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature N5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4 of the present invention group,
A game machine, wherein the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one game ball or less when one game ball is entered.

According to feature N5 of the present invention group, the tertiary ball entry area can provide one or less game balls upon entry of one game ball, so that the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is aimed at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not aimed at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature N6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature N1 to feature N5 of the present invention group,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only in one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the ratio of causing the game ball to flow down in the secondary flow path. is larger than the rate at which game balls flow down the primary flow path.

According to feature N6 of the present invention group, the actuating member, in the actuated state, causes the game ball to flow down only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game ball flows down to the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the balls flow down is greater than the rate at which the game balls flow down to the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game balls flow down to the primary flow path. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the N group of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
The game board is
a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that provides the player with a primary profit;
A game ball can be entered into a tertiary ball entry area (lower operation port 26, out port 28, and equivalent winning port 88L) that provides a player with a tertiary profit smaller than the primary profit. A tertiary flow path with
It has an operating state in which game balls can flow down the primary flow path and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the tertiary flow path, and based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. , an operating member (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state,
A gaming machine, wherein the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path are different in surface forming the flow path in the front-rear direction of the game board.

According to feature O1 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine has an operating state in which game balls can flow down the primary flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path. Since it has an operating member that changes from a non-operating state to an operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player can switch from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. You will play the game with the expectation that it will become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the surfaces forming the flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board are different from each other in the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path, the game machine can diversify the flow of game balls. can. In addition, the game machine must form two flow paths, a primary flow path and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if there is, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature O2.
In the gaming machine described in feature O1 of the invention group,
The game board is
A game ball is placed in a secondary ball entry area (an open starting port 83 and an open winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary profit that is smaller than the primary profit and greater than the tertiary profit. with a secondary flow path that allows the ball to enter,
The operating member is in an operating state in which a game ball can flow down either one of the first flow path and the second flow path, and in which a game ball can flow down in the third flow path. having a non-operating state, and transitioning from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. machine.

According to feature O2 of the group of inventions, the game machine has an operating state in which the game ball can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path. It has a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can enjoy the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Based on this, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board, the game machine is equipped with a game ball. flow can be diversified. In addition, the game machine must form three flow paths, ie, a primary flow path and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if there is, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature O3.
In the gaming machine described in feature O2 of the invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (crun 81 ),
The game machine is
The game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball entry delay means flows down the second flow path until it enters the first ball entry area. a game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the gaming machine immediately performs the provision processing of providing the secondary profit.

According to the feature O3 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine, until the game ball guided to the first ball-entering area by the ball-entering delay means enters the first ball-entering area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary ball entering area, the second profit is immediately given, so that the player can enter the game ball. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first ball entry area, the player immediately enjoys the secondary profit. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature O4.
In the gaming machine described in feature O2 of the invention group,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only in one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the rate at which the game ball flows down in the secondary flow path. is larger than the rate at which game balls flow down the primary flow path.

According to feature O4 of the group of inventions, the actuating member, in the actuated state, causes the game ball to flow down only to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the balls flow down is greater than the rate at which the game balls flow down to the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game balls flow down to the primary flow path. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature O5.
In the gaming machine described in feature O2 of the invention group,
the primary ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
the secondary ball-entering area as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player;
the operating member as a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means;
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means performs the special profit before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to feature O5 of the group of inventions, the specific profit provision means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature O6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 to feature O5 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the tertiary flow path allows a game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entering area in a predetermined game state.

According to the feature O6 of the present invention group, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state, so that the player can play the predetermined game. In the state, when the actuating member is in the non-actuating state, the game ball is not shot toward the tertiary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature O7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature O1 to feature O6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one game ball or less when one game ball is entered.

According to feature O7 of the present invention group, the tertiary ball entry area can provide one or less game balls upon entry of one game ball, so the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is aimed at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not aimed at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group O of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
The game board is
a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that provides the player with a primary profit;
A secondary profit that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an open starting port 83 and an open prize winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary profit smaller than the primary profit. a flow path of
A game ball can be entered into a tertiary ball entry area (lower operating port 26, out port 28, and equivalent winning port 88L) that provides a player with a tertiary profit smaller than the secondary profit. A tertiary flow path with
An operating state in which game balls can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the tertiary flow path. and an operating member (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (crun 81 ),
The game machine is
The game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball entry delay means flows down the second flow path until it enters the first ball entry area. a game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the gaming machine immediately performs the provision processing of providing the secondary profit.

According to feature P1 of the group of the present invention, the game machine has an operating state in which a game ball can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path. It has a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can enjoy the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Based on this, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Further, in the gaming machine, the game ball guided to the first ball-entering area by the ball-entering delay means flows down the secondary flow path until it enters the first ball-entering area. When another game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the player immediately performs the provision processing of giving the secondary profit. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first ball entry area to enter the first ball entry area, the second profit can be enjoyed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature P2.
In the gaming machine described in feature P1 of the invention group,
the primary ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
the secondary ball-entering area as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player;
the operating member as a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means;
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means performs the special profit before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to the feature P2 of the group of inventions, the specific profit provision means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature P3.
In the gaming machine described in feature P1 or feature P2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the tertiary flow path allows a game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entering area in a predetermined game state.

According to the feature P3 of the present invention group, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state. In the state, when the actuating member is in the non-actuating state, the game ball is not shot toward the tertiary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature P4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P3 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. machine.

According to feature P4 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces forming the flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the gaming machine has three flow paths, a primary flow path, a secondary flow path, and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if it must be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature P5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features P1 to P4 of the invention group,
A game machine, wherein the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one game ball or less when one game ball is entered.

According to feature P5 of the present invention group, the tertiary ball entry area can provide one or less game balls upon entry of one game ball, so the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is aimed at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not aimed at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature P6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5 of the invention group,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only in one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the ratio of causing the game ball to flow down in the secondary flow path. is larger than the rate at which game balls flow down the primary flow path.

According to feature P6 of the group of inventions, the actuating member, in the actuated state, causes the game ball to flow down only to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the balls flow down is greater than the rate at which the game balls flow down to the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game balls flow down to the primary flow path. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the feature P group of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25 and operation port 261L), and game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising (main control device 4),
The game board is
a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that provides the player with a primary profit;
A secondary profit that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an open starting port 83 and an open prize winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary profit smaller than the primary profit. a flow path of
a tertiary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a tertiary ball entry area (equivalent prize winning opening 88L) that provides the player with a tertiary profit that is smaller than the secondary profit;
An operating state in which game balls can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the tertiary flow path. and an operating member (rotation distribution means 82) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition,
A gaming machine, wherein the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one game ball or less when one game ball is entered.

According to feature Q1 of the present invention group, the game machine has an operating state in which the game ball can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path. It has a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can enjoy the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Based on this, the game is played in anticipation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the tertiary ball entry area can provide one or less game balls when one game ball is entered, the player can aim at the operation member in the operating state of the operation member. When the operating member is in a non-operating state, the game ball is not shot aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature Q2.
In the gaming machine described in feature Q1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the tertiary flow path allows a game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entering area in a predetermined game state.

According to the feature Q2 of the present invention group, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state, so that the player can play the predetermined game. In the state, when the actuating member is in the non-actuating state, the game ball is not shot toward the tertiary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature Q3.
In the gaming machine described in feature Q1 or feature Q2 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. machine.

According to feature Q3 of the group of inventions, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the gaming machine has three flow paths, a primary flow path, a secondary flow path, and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if it must be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature Q4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3 of the present invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delaying means (crun 81 ),
The game machine is
While the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the first ball entry area, it flows down the second flow path. a game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the game machine immediately performs the provision processing of providing the secondary profit.

According to the feature Q4 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine, until the game ball guided to the first ball-entering area by the ball-entering delay means enters the first ball-entering area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary ball entering area, the second profit is immediately given, so that the player can enter the game ball. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first ball entry area, the player immediately enjoys the secondary profit. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature Q5.
In the gaming machine described in feature Q4 of the invention group,
the primary ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
the secondary ball-entering area as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player;
the operating member as a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means;
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means, before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, performs the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to feature Q5 of the group of inventions, the specific profit giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature Q6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q5 of the present invention group,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only in one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the ratio of causing the game ball to flow down in the secondary flow path. is larger than the rate at which game balls flow down the primary flow path.

According to the feature Q6 of the group of inventions, the operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game ball flows down to the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the balls flow down is greater than the rate at which the game balls flow down to the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game balls flow down to the primary flow path. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the feature Q group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
The game board is
a primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that provides the player with a primary profit;
A secondary profit that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an open starting port 83 and an open prize winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary profit smaller than the primary profit. a flow path of
A game ball can be entered into a tertiary ball entry area (lower operating port 26, out port 28, and equivalent winning port 88L) that provides a player with a tertiary profit smaller than the secondary profit. A tertiary flow path with
An operating state in which game balls can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the tertiary flow path. and an operating member (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition,
The operating member, in the operating state, causes the game ball to flow down only in one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the ratio of causing the game ball to flow down in the secondary flow path. is larger than the rate at which game balls are allowed to flow down the primary flow path.

According to feature R1 of the present invention group, the game machine has an operating state in which the game ball can flow down either one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path. It has a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player can enjoy the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Based on this, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the secondary flow path is the second flow path. Since it is larger than the ratio of game balls flowing down the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature R2.
In the gaming machine described in feature R1 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the tertiary flow path allows a game ball to enter only the tertiary ball entering area in a predetermined game state.

According to feature R2 of the present invention group, the tertiary flow path allows the game ball to be entered only in the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state. In the state, when the actuating member is in the non-actuating state, the game ball is not shot toward the tertiary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining profit even when the game ball is shot toward the tertiary flow path in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature R3.
In the gaming machine described in feature R1 or feature R2 of the invention group,
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different from each other in the surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. machine.

According to feature R3 of the group of inventions, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the tertiary flow path are different in surface forming the flow path in the front and back direction of the game board. Therefore, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of game balls. In addition, the gaming machine has three flow paths, a primary flow path, a secondary flow path, and a tertiary flow path, in the flow path when game balls are shot toward one route. Even if it must be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature R4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature R1 to feature R3 of the present invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (crun 81 ),
The game machine is
The game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball entry delay means flows down the second flow path until it enters the first ball entry area. a game ball enters the secondary ball entry area, the gaming machine immediately performs the provision processing of providing the secondary profit.

According to feature R4 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine, until the game ball guided to the first ball-entering area by the ball-entering delay means enters the first ball-entering area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary ball entering area, the second profit is immediately given, so that the player can enter the game ball. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first ball entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first ball entry area, the player immediately enjoys the secondary profit. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature R5.
In the gaming machine described in feature R4 of the invention group,
the primary ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
the secondary ball-entering area as a specific profit giving means for giving a profit to the player;
the operating member as a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means;
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means performs the special profit before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to feature R5 of the group of inventions, the specific profit provision means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature R6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature R1 to feature R5 of the invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one game ball or less when one game ball is entered.

According to feature R6 of the present invention group, the tertiary ball entry area can provide one or less game balls upon entry of one game ball, so the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is aimed at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not aimed at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group R of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic group S>
Feature S1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state A gaming machine characterized by comprising special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing

According to the feature S1 of the present invention group, the game machine, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, performs the specific control state. Since the special game executing means for executing a special game different from the game in the controlled state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S2.
In the gaming machine described in feature S1 of the invention group,
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a special game path (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball-entering delay means.

According to the characteristic S2 of the present invention group, the special game execution means includes the special game payout means for putting out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can execute the special game. It is possible to increase the number of game balls at the time.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means to when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature S3.
In the gaming machine described in feature S2 of the invention group,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to the feature S3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so as to be able to enter the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S4.
In the gaming machine described in feature S3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a regulation state switching means for switching (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature S4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the regulation state switching means for switching to the regulation state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special game ball entering means when the special game is executed, and when the special game is not executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S5.
In the gaming machine described in feature S3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter,
A second ball entry, in which the period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine comprising: a ball-entering waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball-entering waiting period.

According to the feature S5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game Since the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period is provided, the player can target the special game ball entry means and shoot the game ball when the special game is being executed. When the game ball is shot and the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features S2 to S5 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to the feature S6 of the group of the present invention, the croon includes a guideable hole that can guide a game ball turning on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball turning on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

Feature S7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features S2 to S6 of the present invention group,
Special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) for distributing game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S7 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with the special allocating means for allocating the game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player can , the player plays the game expecting that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S8.
In the gaming machine described in feature S7 of the invention group,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific induction state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distributable state (normal induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocating state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising distribution state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching to a disabled state.

According to the feature S8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is not being executed. to the undistributable state, the player plays the game expecting that the special distribution means will be switched to the distributable state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature S9.
In the gaming machine described in feature S8 of the invention group,
The special allocating means, in the allocable state, allots the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board, and in the non-allocable state, A gaming machine characterized by distributing game balls flowing down the special game path so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. .

According to the feature S9 of the present invention group, the special allocating means, in the allocable state, distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board, and distributes it. In the disabled state, the game machine diversifies the flow of the game balls because it is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. be able to.

According to the group of characteristics S of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins a jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, so the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A first route (left-handed route) leading to the starting ball entry means;
Leading to the special game payout means, comprising a second route (right-handed route) different from the first route,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
a launch suppressing means for suppressing the launching of the game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means;
The gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to the feature T1 of the present invention group, the launch suppressing means suppresses the shooting of the game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means. A game ball is not shot toward the second path aiming at the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature T2.
In the gaming machine described in feature T1 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
A gaming machine, wherein the launch restraint means comprises regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning) for switching the game ball payout means to either the non-regulated state or the regulated state.

According to the feature T2 of the present invention group, the launch restraining means has the regulated state switching means for switching the game ball payout means between the non-regulated state and the regulated state. When the game ball putting-out means is switched to the regulated state, the game balls are not shot toward the second path aiming at the special game ball-entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature T3.
In the gaming machine described in feature T1 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter,
A second ball entry, in which the period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine, wherein the launch suppression means comprises ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period.

According to feature T3 of the present invention group, the launch suppression means includes ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period. Therefore, when the player switches to the second ball-entering waiting period by the ball-entering waiting period switching means, the player does not shoot the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball-entering means. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature T4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features T1 to T3 of the present invention group,
specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state Special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing
A gaming machine, wherein the special game execution means comprises the special game payout means.

According to feature T4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, performs the specific Since the special game executing means for executing a special game different from the game in the controlled state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature T5.
In the gaming machine described in feature T4 of the invention group,
The special game execution means is
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising the second route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball-entering delay means.

According to feature T5 of the present invention group, the special game execution means includes special game payout means for putting out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, so that the player can execute the special game. It is possible to increase the number of game balls at the time.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means. A special game different from the game in the controlled state can be enjoyed.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the second path.

Feature T6.
In the gaming machine described in feature T5 of the invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to feature T6 of the present invention group, the croon has a guideable hole that can guide a game ball turning on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball turning on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

Feature T7.
In the gaming machine described in feature T5 or feature T6 of the invention group,
Special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) for distributing game balls flowing down the second path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means ) is provided.

According to feature T7 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine is equipped with a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the second path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delaying means. Players play the game expecting that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature T8.
In the gaming machine described in feature T7 of the invention group,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific induction state) in which game balls flowing down the second path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distributable state (normal guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the second path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocating state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising distribution state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching to a disabled state.

According to feature T8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is not being executed. to the undistributable state, the player plays the game expecting that the special distribution means will be switched to the distributable state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature T9.
In the gaming machine described in feature T8 of the invention group,
The special allocating means, in the allocable state, allots the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board, and in the non-allocable state, A game characterized by distributing the game balls flowing down the second path so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. machine.

According to feature T9 of the present invention group, the special allocating means, in the allocable state, distributes and distributes the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the surface of the game board. In the disabled state, the game machine diversifies the flow of the game balls because it is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. be able to.

According to the group of features T of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means), and starts variable display of patterns. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
Such a gaming machine comprises a first route (left-handed route) and a second route (right-handed route) different from the first route, and a player can choose between the first route and the second route. A game ball is shot toward one of the paths.

However, if either one of the first route and the second route is a route advantageous to the player, the player can proceed toward the route advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine. There is a problem that a game ball is shot and the player cannot play comfortably.

<Characteristic group U>
Features U1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, a profit is given to the player according to the length of the period before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means. and a period profit granting means (open start port 83 and open prize winning device 84) that grants
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a special gaming path (right-handed route) leading to both the period profit imparting means and the entering ball delaying means.

According to feature U1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means, and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Since the delay means is provided, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state to when the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state. .
After the game state transition means shifts the game state to the specific control state, the period profit provision means determines the length of the period until the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state. A profit can be awarded to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U2.
In the gaming machine described in feature U1 of the invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to the feature U2 of the group of the present invention, the croon has a guideable hole that can guide a game ball turning on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball turning on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

Feature U3.
In the gaming machine described in feature U1 or feature U2 of the invention group,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state Special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) as the period profit granting means for paying out game balls upon entry of the game balls flowing down the game area;
A gaming machine comprising the ball-entering delay means.

According to the feature U3 of the present invention group, the special game execution means includes the special game payout means for putting out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, so that the player can execute the special game. It is possible to increase the number of game balls at the time.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means to when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature U4.
In the gaming machine described in feature U3 of the invention group,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to feature U4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to be entered when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means. Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U5.
In the gaming machine described in feature U4 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a regulation state switching means for switching (winning process for open winning).

According to feature U5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulation state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the regulation state switching means for switching to the regulation state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special game ball entering means when the special game is executed, and when the special game is not executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U6.
In the gaming machine described in feature U4 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter,
A second ball entry, in which the period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine comprising: a ball-entering waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball-entering waiting period.

According to feature U6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game Since the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period is provided, the player can target the special game ball entry means and shoot the game ball when the special game is being executed. When the game ball is shot and the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature U3 to feature U6 of the present invention group,
Special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) for distributing game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature U7 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special allocating means for allocating game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player can , the player plays the game expecting that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U8.
In the gaming machine described in feature U7 of the invention group,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific induction state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distributable state (normal induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocating state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising distribution state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching to a disabled state.

According to feature U8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is not being executed. to the undistributable state, the player plays the game expecting that the special distribution means will be switched to the distributable state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature U9.
In the gaming machine described in feature U8 of the invention group,
The special allocating means, in the allocable state, allots the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board, and in the non-allocable state, A gaming machine characterized by distributing game balls flowing down the special game path so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. .

According to feature U9 of the present invention group, the special allocating means, in the allocable state, distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board. In the disabled state, the game machine diversifies the flow of the game balls because it is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. be able to.

According to the characteristic U group of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins a jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, so the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Characteristic group V>
Feature V1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
Specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for entering game balls flowing down the game area;
Specific profit giving means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) for giving profit to the player;
Special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit provision means prepared,
After allocating the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entering means by the special allocating means, the specific profit giving means performs the special profit before the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on game balls distributed to the specific profit giving means by a distribution means.

According to feature V1 of the present invention group, the specific profit giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area by the special distribution means to the specific ball entering means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. A profit is given to the player based on the game balls previously distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player can enjoy the profit given by the specific profit giving means. can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature V2.
In the gaming machine described in feature V1 of the invention group,
the specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state Special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open prize winning device 84) as the specific profit providing means for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter;
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a special game path (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball-entering delay means.

According to feature V2 of the present invention group, the special game execution means includes special game payout means for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, so that the player can execute the special game. It is possible to increase the number of game balls at the time.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means to when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature V3.
In the gaming machine described in feature V2 of the invention group,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to feature V3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so as to be able to enter the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature V4.
In the gaming machine described in feature V3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a regulation state switching means for switching (winning process for open winning).

According to feature V4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the regulation state switching means for switching to the regulation state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special game ball entering means when the special game is executed, and when the special game is not executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature V5.
In the gaming machine described in feature V3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter,
A second ball entry, in which the period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine comprising: a ball-entering waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball-entering waiting period.

According to feature V5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game Since the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period is provided, the player can target the special game ball entry means and shoot the game ball when the special game is being executed. When the game ball is shot and the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature V6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features V2 to V5 of the invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to feature V6 of the present invention group, the croon has a guideable hole that can guide a game ball turning on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball turning on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

Feature V7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features V2 to V6 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific induction state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distributable state (normal induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocating state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising distribution state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching to a disabled state.

According to feature V7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is not being executed. to the undistributable state, the player plays the game expecting that the special distribution means will be switched to the distributable state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature V8.
In the gaming machine described in feature V7 of the invention group,
The special allocating means, in the allocable state, allots the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board, and in the non-allocable state, A gaming machine characterized by distributing game balls flowing down the special game path so as not to distribute the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. .

According to feature V8 of the present invention group, the special allocating means, in the allocable state, distributes and distributes the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the surface of the game board. In the disabled state, the game machine diversifies the flow of the game balls because it is configured so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. be able to.

According to the characteristic group V of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which game balls can enter. Since a large number of game balls are put out by shifting the prize-winning device, the flow of giving profit to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. .

<Characteristic group W>
Feature W1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
Special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82) for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path,
The special distribution means distributes game balls to the first distribution channel by passing them through the surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to the second distribution channel by passing them through the back surface of the game board. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature W1 of the present invention group, the special distribution means distributes the game balls to the first distribution channel by passing them through the surface of the game board, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution channel by passing them through the back surface of the game board. Since the game balls are distributed to the game balls, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game balls.

Feature W2.
In the gaming machine described in feature W1 of the invention group,
specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state Special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes a special game path (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
Said special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down said special game path to either said special game payout means or said ball entry delay means via said first distribution path. .

According to the feature W2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, performs the specific Since the special game executing means for executing a special game different from the game in the controlled state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the special game execution means has a special game payout means for putting out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing the special game. can.
The special game execution means includes ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means to when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature W3.
In the gaming machine described in feature W2 of the invention group,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to the feature W3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so as to be able to enter the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature W4.
In the gaming machine described in feature W3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising switching regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to feature W4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the regulation state switching means for switching to the regulation state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special game ball entering means when the special game is executed, and when the special game is not executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature W5.
In the gaming machine described in feature W3 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period of time from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be allowed to enter;
A second ball entry in which a period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine comprising: a ball-entering waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball-entering waiting period.

According to the feature W5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game Since the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period is provided, the player can target the special game ball entry means and shoot the game ball when the special game is being executed. When the game ball is shot and the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature W6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features W2 to W5 of the invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to the feature W6 of the group of the present invention, the croon has a guideable hole that can guide a game ball turning on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball turning on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

Feature W7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features W2 to W6 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific induction state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distributable state (normal induction state) in which the game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocating state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising distribution state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching to a disabled state.

According to feature W7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocating means to the allocable state when the special game is not being executed. to the undistributable state, the player plays the game expecting that the special distribution means will be switched to the distributable state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the feature W group of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately distribute the falling directions of the game balls, windmills, and the like in the game area.

However, since the game machine distributes the game balls by passing them through the surface of the game board, the flow becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic group X>
Feature X1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 16) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, and a starting ball entry means (upper operation port) for executing an internal lottery when a game ball flowing down the game area enters 25, lower operating port 26, and operating port 261L), and based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game state is changed to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a game state transition means (main controller 4) for transition,
Special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path,
The special sorting means is
A distributable state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the first distribution channel or the second distribution channel;
a distributable state (normal induction state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are not distributed to either the first distribution channel or the second distribution channel;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) for switching the special allocation means between the allocating possible state and the allocating impossible state.

According to the feature X1 of the group of the present invention, the game machine includes the allocation state switching means for switching the special allocation means between the allocation possible state and the allocation impossible state. The game is played in anticipation that the state switching means will switch the special allocating means to the allocable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature X2.
In the gaming machine described in feature X1 of the invention group,
The special distribution means distributes the game balls to either the first distribution channel or the second distribution channel by passing them through the surface of the game board, and the game balls by passing them through the back surface of the game board. A gaming machine characterized by distributing game balls to a flow path different from the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path.

According to the feature X2 of the present invention group, the game balls are distributed to either the first distributing channel or the second distributing channel by passing through the surface of the game board, and the first distribution channel is distributed by passing through the back surface of the game board. Since game balls are distributed to channels different from the second distribution channel and the second distribution channel, the game machine can diversify the flow of game balls.

Feature X3.
In the gaming machine described in feature X1 or feature X2 of the invention group,
specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters;
specific control start means (special game execution processing) for starting a game in the specific control state when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means after the game state transition means has shifted the game state to the specific control state; ,
After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, a special game different from the game in the specific control state Special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) for paying out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (clone 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine includes a special game path (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
The special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to the special game payout means via the first distribution flow path, and the ball entry delay means via the second distribution flow path. A game machine characterized by allocating to.

According to the feature X3 of the present invention group, the game machine, after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means, performs the specific control state. Since the special game executing means for executing a special game different from the game in the controlled state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.
In addition, since the special game execution means has a special game payout means for putting out game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing the special game. can.
The special game executing means includes ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and for delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means to when the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by shooting the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature X4.
In the gaming machine described in feature X3 of the invention group,
The special game payout means is
Special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
A game ball payout means (open prize winning device 84) for putting out a game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area,
The gaming machine, wherein the game ball payout means is set to allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entering means when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means.

According to the feature X4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so as to be able to enter the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature X5.
In the gaming machine described in feature X4 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not restricted to be allowed to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
a regulating state for regulating the game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means so that the game ball cannot be entered;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a regulation state switching means for switching (winning process for open winning).

According to feature X5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the regulation state switching means for switching to the regulation state is provided, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the special game ball entering means when the special game is executed, and when the special game is not executed. In addition, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature X6.
In the gaming machine described in feature X4 of the invention group,
The game ball payout means is
A first ball entry standby period, which is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter,
A second ball entry, in which the period from when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is longer than the predetermined period. a waiting period;
The gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine comprising: a ball-entering waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball-entering waiting period.

According to the feature X6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball entry waiting period to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim the game ball at the special game ball entry means when the special game is being executed. When the game ball is shot and the special game is not executed, the game ball is not shot aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature X7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature X3 to feature X6 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
Equipped with a croon (croon 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) for turning the game ball,
The clone is
a guideable hole (hole 814) that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising guide-disabled holes (holes 815, 816) that disable guidance of a game ball that revolves on the revolving surface to the specific ball-entering means.

According to the characteristic X7 of the present invention group, the croon has a guideable hole that can guide a game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific ball entering means, and a game ball that turns on the turning surface that cannot be guided to the specific ball entering means. After shifting the game state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the incoming ball delay means.

According to the characteristic X group of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the attention of the player to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known which has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of patterns. This game machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts variable display of patterns when a game ball enters an operation opening (starting ball entry means). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the game machine finally stop-displays a specific pattern combination or the like on the variable display means, and shifts the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately distribute the falling directions of the game balls, windmills, and the like in the game area.

However, since game balls are always sorted by various members such as nails and windmills in the game machine, the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game is lowered. be.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

1 Pachinko machine 24 General winning opening 25 Upper operating opening 26 Lower operating opening 27 Variable winning device 271 Large winning opening 272 Open/close door 273 Variable winning drive unit 28 Out Mouth 35... Design display device 4... Main control device 42... MPU 5... Sound emission control device 52... MPU 6... Display control device 62... MPU.

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed on the game board;
Starting ball entry means that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery based on the entry of a game ball flowing down the game area;
A gaming machine comprising game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific game control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery ,
This game machine is
a primary flow detectable state in which a primary value can be imparted to a player when a game ball is detected ;
a secondary flow detectable state in which a secondary value smaller than the primary value can be given to the player when the game ball is detected ;
a tertiary flow detectable state that can give a tertiary value smaller than the secondary value to the player when the game ball is detected ,
primary detection means capable of detecting a predetermined game ball that has flowed down in the primary flow detectable state;
a secondary detection means capable of detecting a specific game ball that has flowed down in the secondary flow detectable state;
a tertiary detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has flowed down in the tertiary flow detectable state;
In a period in which the game ball can flow in both the primary flow detectable state and the secondary flow detectable state , the primary flow detectable state or the secondary flow detectable state an actuating member controlled to a predetermined operating state in which game balls can flow down in any one of the above states , and a non-operating state in which game balls can flow down in the third flow detectable state ;
switching means for switching the operating member from the non-operating state to the predetermined operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
After the start of the specific game control state, it shifts to a predetermined control state, and when the specific ball entry condition is established after the transition to the predetermined control state, it is possible to shift to a special game control state,
Both the first flow detectable state and the second flow detectable state are configured to be generated after the start of the same predetermined control state after shifting to the specific game control state,
This game machine is
The first flow detectable state, the second flow detectable state, and the third flow detectable state have channels formed on different surfaces when viewed from the front of the game board,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a game ball is detected by the tertiary detection means, one game ball or less can be provided for one game ball detected.

Images